JP2019122698A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing decline in game interest and capable of suitably operating second control means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: holding storage means capable of storing information on a variable display as holding storage; holding display means capable of displaying holding display corresponding to the holding storage stored in the holding storage means at a corresponding position; and specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance suggesting to be controlled to be in an advantageous state. The holding display means can execute an appearance display of the holding display corresponding to new holding storage for a predetermined period when the holding storage is newly stored, and restricts execution of the appearance display when new holding storage is stored during execution of the specific performance. A performance control board converts variation pattern designation commands "8101" to "8102" into "8100", thereby executing a step S90171 by treating "8100" to "8102" as the same command.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling an advantageous state for the player.

  In the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of information on variable display can be stored as a hold storage, and a hold display corresponding to each of the plurality of hold memories can be displayed at each of a plurality of corresponding positions corresponding to the number of hold memories. It has become. In addition, among such gaming machines, the appearance display (display effect) accompanying the display of the new hold display based on the occurrence of the new hold storage, the corresponding position corresponding to the new hold memory number There is something that can be performed in (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-97173, A

  However, according to Patent Document 1, when a new hold storage occurs during execution of a specific effect which is suggested to be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, an appearance display is performed during execution of the specific effect. As a result, there is a problem that the game interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in game interest caused by the appearance display being performed during a specific effect.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, the game machine according to the means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes S109 and S110 in the start winning process shown in FIG. 12);
The hold display unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 21) can display the hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit at the corresponding position (for example, the hold 1 display position to the hold 8 display position). A portion for executing the hold effect process (particularly, the hold display / active display shift effect process shown in FIG. 31);
Specific effect executing means capable of executing specific effects (for example, super reach effects) suggesting being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the process during the effect design variation shown in FIG. 37) When,
Equipped with
The pending display means is
When the pending storage is newly stored, it is possible to execute the appearance display (for example, first start winning presentation effect) of the pending display corresponding to the new pending storage over a predetermined period (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) Is a portion for executing the first start winning effect execution process shown in FIG. 28),
If a new hold storage is stored while the specific effect is being executed, the execution of the appearance display is limited (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs super reach in S261 in the hold display preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 23). If it is determined that the execution period of the effect is under execution, the on-hold display advance notice effect determining process is ended without setting the first start winning effect executing flag, so the first start in S282 of the start winning effect process shown in FIG. A portion where it is determined that the winning effect under execution flag is not set, and the first start winning effect execution process of S286 is not executed),
further,
First control means (for example, the main substrate 9011) for outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a variation pattern specification command);
And second control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for executing processing (for example, step S90171 which is processing for effect execution) according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) as the same command (for example, variation pattern designation command “8100”) and executes the processing (for example, In step S90752, the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are converted into “8100” (see also FIG. 64), treated as “8100”, and step S90171 is executed).
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the appearance display being executed during the specific effect. Further, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.
Note that the appearance display may or may not include a habit of displaying the hold display corresponding to the new hold storage at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages. Furthermore, in the case where the appearance display includes the habit of displaying the holding display corresponding to the new holding storage at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of holding memories, the holding corresponding to the new holding storage is restricted by restricting the execution display. The display can be prevented from being displayed at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of pending storages.

  Further, the first control means and the second control means may be configured of a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  In addition, the specific effect execution means (for example, CPU 120, 90120 for effect control) may be included in the second control means (for example, effect control boards 12, 9012). That is, the second control means, which executes processing according to the command output by the first control means, can execute a specific effect (for example, super reach effect) that suggests control in an advantageous state (for example, effect control) It is good also as a part which CPU120 performs processing during a production | presentation symbol variation shown in FIG.

  In addition, the suspension display unit (for example, the effect control CPUs 120 and 90120) may be included in the second control unit (for example, the effect control boards 12 and 9012). That is, the second control means that executes processing according to the command output by the first control means may be capable of executing the hold display and the appearance display.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1;
The hold display means can display the hold display by moving from the appearance position to be displayed when the hold storage is newly stored to the corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold memories as the appearance display. After the new hold display reaches the move destination position as the start winning effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display / active display update process to display a new hold storage in the hold storage display area 5D) ,
At least one of the movement period and the movement length for moving the hold display to the corresponding position in the appearance display differs depending on the corresponding position of the move destination (for example, for the effect period of the start winning effect, the character image C holds The presentation time T0 for moving the hold display to the active display area 5F via the display area 5D is the longest, and the play time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T1, effect time T2 for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 2 display position of the hold storage display area 5D, move the hold display from the character image C to the hold 3 display position of the hold storage display area 5D Presentation time T3, from the character image C to the hold 4 display position of the hold storage display area 5D hold display Effect time T4 for moving, effect time T5 for moving the hold display from character image C to hold 5 display position of hold storage display area 5D, hold from character image C to hold 6 display position for hold storage display area 5D Effect time T6 for moving the display, effect time T7 for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 7 display position of the hold storage display area 5D, hold 8 display position for the hold storage display area 5D from the character image C The effect time becomes shorter in order of effect time T8 for moving the hold display to the hold display, and the distance from the character image C to the active display area 5F is the longest for the distance for which the hold display is more than that in the start winning effect The distance from image C to the hold 1 display position, from character image C to the hold 2 display position Release, distance from character image C to hold 3 display position, distance from character image C to hold 4 display position, distance from character image C to hold 5 display position, distance from character image C to hold 6 display position, The distance from the character image C to the hold 7 display position and the distance from the character image C to the hold 8 display position become shorter in order)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to display the movement of the appropriate hold display according to the corresponding position in the appearance display.

The gaming machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2;
The pending display means is
The pending display can be displayed by moving from the appearing position to be displayed when the pending storage is newly stored as the occurrence display to the corresponding position corresponding to the pending storage number (for example, new as a first start winning effect) After the hold display has reached the destination position, the effect control CPU 120 executes hold display / active display update processing to display a new hold storage in the hold storage display area 5D),
A second display mode (for example, display pattern β or display pattern) different from the first display mode (for example, display pattern α) or the first display mode before displaying the hold display at least at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of reserved memories In the case where it is possible to display in γ) (for example, the execution of the suspension display advance presentation effect is determined based on the start winning combination and 0 times is determined as the number of shifts as shown in FIG. 26), display pattern β or display A portion for moving the hold display or the active display displayed in the pattern γ toward the hold storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F),
It is a means different from the said suspension display means, Comprising: When the said suspension display means is displaying the suspension display in the said 2nd display mode, the corresponding presentation which can perform the corresponding | compatible production corresponding to a said 2nd display mode The execution means is provided (for example, when the CPU 120 for effect control executes the hold display mode corresponding LED lighting process shown in FIG. 33, the hold display mode corresponding LED 30 is lit in a color according to the display mode (display pattern) of the hold display Part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize by the corresponding effect that the hold display being displayed in the second display mode is present.

The gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3, wherein
The hold display means includes variable display correspondence display means capable of moving the hold display corresponding to the variable display to the variable display correspondence display position as variable display correspondence display when the variable display is started (for example, The effect display CPU 120 performs the hold display / active display movement effect process shown in FIG. 31 to direct the hold display displayed at the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D as the active display toward the active display area 5F. The part to be moved) is characterized.
According to this feature, it can be easily understood whether the variable display to be started is the variable display corresponding to any of the pending display.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 4;
The pending display means is configured to display the appearance display when a new pending storage is stored in the pending storage means when the pending storage is not stored in the pending storage means and the variable display is not executed. Do not execute at least a part (for example, as shown in FIG. 44 as the first modification, when the number of pending storages is 0 and a new start winning combination occurs during non-execution of variable display, the second start winning effect is Part that displays the hold display as an active display in the active display area 5F without executing it)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to shorten the period until the variable display correspondence display is displayed.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 4;
The pending display means is a pending storage means when new pending storage is stored in the pending storage means when the pending storage is not stored in the pending storage means and variable display is not executed. The same appearance display as the appearance display to be executed when new holding storage is stored in the holding storage means when the holding storage is not stored in the variable storage and the variable display is being executed (for example, As shown in 30, when the number of pending storages is 0 and a new starting winning combination occurs during non-execution of variable display, a new pending display as the second starting winning effect is the same character as the first starting winning effect A part to move from the image C to the hold storage display area 5D and thereafter to move the hold display to the active display area 5F)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since movement can be made common, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity for displaying movement, and at the same time, it is possible for the player to know that holding storage has been performed in which new variable display is performed. Is easier to recognize.

The gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, wherein
The hold display means can change the display mode of the hold display from a first display mode (for example, display pattern α) to a second display mode different from the first display mode.
Action effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 38) capable of executing an action effect that suggests that the hold display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode by acting on the hold display A part to execute the action effect shown),
The effect presentation executing means restricts the execution of the operation presentation during the movement of the suspension display (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the operation presentation is a part executed after the termination display / active display transition presentation is finished) )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to simplify the process for executing the effect presentation.

A gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The hold display means can change the display mode of the hold display from a first display mode (for example, display pattern α) to a second display mode (for example, display pattern β or display pattern γ) different from the first display mode And
Action effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 38) capable of executing an action effect that suggests that the hold display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode by acting on the hold display A part to execute the action effect shown),
When the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means reaches the upper limit value, the pending display means can execute the operation effect in the next variable display (for example, as shown in the fourth modification) The part that performs the effects in the next variable display when the number of pending storage reaches the upper limit during the variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to promote the game so that the new holding storage is stored in the holding storage means.

A gaming machine according to means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8.
The pending display means is
On the basis of the execution of a new variable display that the pending storage corresponding to the variable display is erased, the pending display corresponding to the pending storage other than the erased pending storage is newly added after the deletion of the pending storage. It can be moved to the corresponding position corresponding to the number of pending storages and displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display / active display transition effect processing shown in FIG. 31),
From the predetermined appearance position (for example, the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5) to the corresponding position corresponding to the number of pending storages based on the fact that the pending storage is newly stored as the occurrence display (For example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first start winning effect execution process shown in FIG. 28),
Based on the fact that the number of pending storages has changed due to the execution of a new variable display during execution of the occurrence display, it is possible to set the corresponding position for the appearing display under execution as the corresponding position corresponding to the new number of pending storages (For example, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the number of held memories has decreased in S284 of the start winning effect process shown in FIG. 27, the move destination position of the hold display in the first start winning effect is redetermined in S285 portion)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the interruption of the appearance display being executed, and to reduce the rendering effect by the appearance display.

The gaming machine according to means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9, wherein
The pending display means is
Action effect executing means capable of executing action effects acting on the pending display during the appearance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 as the second modification, move as a first start winning effect or a second start winning effect With a part that hides the pending display in the moving object or the image),
The hold display means can change the display mode of the hold display on which the effect is exerted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 as a second modification, the hold display concealed by a movable body or an image) Part that changes the display mode)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can be made to pay attention to the hold display during the appearance display, and the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine according to means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10.
A change production execution means (for example, capable of executing a change effect that can change the display mode of the pending display to any of the display modes of different stages having different advantageous degrees (for example, the ratio of variation display results to a big hit) As a third modification, the effect control CPU 120 is provided with a portion for executing the action effect shown in FIG.
The change production executing means is
A plurality of display modes of the first change effect and the effect mode (for example, effect pattern A and effect pattern B effect presentation) that can be changed from the display mode before the change to the display mode advantageous to one or more steps It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second change effect (for example, an action effect of the effect pattern C) which can be changed to the display mode of the specific stage of the stages.
According to this feature, the rendering effect can be improved.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following means 12-means 23 is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a first control means (main control unit 310) for outputting a command based on a lottery as shown in JP 2007-130191 A, and a command outputted by the first control means And a second control unit (sub control unit 340) that executes processing according to (variation pattern command). However, for example, in the development of the above-described gaming machine, a command (for example, a command indicating a fluctuation pattern) output by the first control means may be prepared in advance in a large amount (because adding it later complicates the operation) As a result, commands may be left over the processing that the second control means can perform (for example, commands may be left over the fluctuation pattern actually used). In such a case, for example, there may occur a disadvantage that the second control means can not operate the second control means suitably for the surplus commands (for example, a disadvantage that there is no effect to be executed based on the surplus commands). In the gaming machine, such a disadvantage is not taken into consideration. As in this example, in the conventional gaming machine, there has been a problem that the second control means can not be suitably operated for a predetermined command. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine capable of suitably operating the second control means is required.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of means 12 according to another aspect is:
First control means (for example, the main substrate 9011) for outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a variation pattern specification command);
And second control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for executing processing (for example, step S90171 which is processing for effect execution) according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”) as the same command (for example, variation pattern designation command “8100”) and executes the processing (for example, In step S90752, the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are converted into “8100” (see also FIG. 64), treated as “8100”, and step S90171 is executed),
It is characterized by

  Note that the first control unit and the second control unit may be configured by a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  According to such a configuration, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine of means 13 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 12, wherein
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means is
Treat the second command as the first command (for example, see FIG. 64)
The same kind of operation is received when the first command is received from the first control means, and when the second command is received from the first control means and the received second command is treated as the first command. The same processing is executed regardless of whether the variation pattern designation command “8100” is converted from “8101” or not by executing the effect at the same rate (for example, by step S90171 etc.) Perform various types of image effects (reach effect, advance notice, variable display of decorative pattern) at the same rate),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine according to the means 14 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 12 or the means 13.
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means treats the second command as the first command (for example, see FIG. 64)
The first command and the second command are commands output by lottery referring to the same table (for example, the variation pattern designation commands “8100” and “8101” are the same table as shown in FIG. 56). As a command specifying the variation pattern selected in the referred lottery (output based on the lottery),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of means 15 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to means 14, wherein
The ratio at which the first command is output is the highest in all the lotterys including the lottery or the lottery (for example, see FIGS. 55 to 56),
The ratio at which the second command is output is the lowest in the lottery or all the lottery including the lottery (for example, see FIGS. 55 to 56),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the use ratio of the second command can be reduced, and the occurrence of inconvenience caused by a malfunction or the like that can not handle the first command as the second command can be minimized. Further, by treating the second command as the first command having a high determination ratio, adjustment of the determination ratio in the lottery can be facilitated.

The gaming machine according to the means 16 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to the means 12 or the means 13.
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
The second control means treats the second command as the first command (for example, see FIG. 64)
The first command and the second command are commands that are not individually output in lotterys using different tables (see, for example, FIGS. 55 to 56).
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine according to means 17 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 16,
The plurality of commands include a first command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) and a second command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8101”).
In the first command and the second command, whether the serial number of the entire command (for example, the serial number attached to each variation pattern) or the value indicated by these commands (for example, the value of the EXT data) is within a predetermined range Belongs to a group that specifies a variation pattern of the same category (for example, non-reach) (for example, see FIG. 54),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first command and the second command can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine according to means 18 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 17.
The plurality of commands are commands (for example, a variation pattern specification command) indicating an effect pattern (for example, a variation pattern),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated for frequently used commands.

The gaming machine according to means 19 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 17.
The plurality of commands are commands indicating information used for executing preview advance notice effects (for example, see FIG. 65).
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated for frequently used commands.

The gaming machine of means 20 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 17,
The plurality of commands are commands (for example, a variation pattern specification command) indicating a variation pattern of the variable display (for example, variation pattern),
The plurality of commands (for example, fluctuation patterns “PA1′-1” to “PA1′−3”) treated as the same command are the ones specifying the same fluctuation time (for example, special figure fluctuation time) (for example, As shown in FIG. 54, the variation patterns “PA1′-1” to “PA1′-3” designate the same special figure variation time),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the same effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) can be performed without a sense of incongruity with each of a plurality of commands.

The gaming machine according to means 21 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 20,
The second control means specifies the other command (for example, variation pattern specification commands “8101” to “8102”) other than the specific command (for example, variation pattern specification command “8100”) among the plurality of commands. Convert into a command and hold it in storage means (for example, a variation pattern designation command storage area) (for example, steps S90752 to S90753),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine of means 22 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 21,
The first control means is main control means (for example, main board 9011) for controlling the progress of the game,
The second control means is effect control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for controlling the execution of effects.
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the effect control means can be suitably operated.

The gaming machine of means 23 according to another aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of means 12 to 22,
The first control means is a first effect control means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control in a modification) which controls the progress of effects,
The second control means is a second effect control means (for example, a display control unit 90123 in the modification) for controlling the execution of effects.
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, the second effect control means can be suitably operated.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment as viewed from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a pachinko game machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates a production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a prize determination result storage buffer, and (C) is a diagram of an active display storage buffer It is a figure showing composition. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reservation production processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display advance notice production | presentation determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display advance notice production | presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows presentation time for every move destination position in starting winning a prize production. (A) is a figure which shows the example of the display pattern determination ratio about pending storage of big hit, (B) is a figure which shows the example of the display pattern determination ratio about pending storage of loss. (A) is a figure showing an example of the determination rate of the display mode change timing of the suspension display for the big hit retention storage, (B) is the determination ratio of the display mode change timing of the suspension display for the suspension storage of the loss Is a diagram illustrating an example of It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize production processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 1st starting winning a prize execution processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd starting winning a prize execution processing. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect of 1st starting winning a prize production and 2nd starting winning a prize production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display * active display transfer presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display * active display update process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pending display mode corresponding LED lighting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an operation production determination process. (A) and (B) is a figure which shows the execution ratio and non-execution ratio of effect presentation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during production design variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect production process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing which changes the display mode of a pending | holding display and an active display. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in a present Example. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in a present Example. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in a present Example. It is a figure which shows the presentation aspect in the case of performing a starting winning a prize presentation during super reach production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect in the fluctuation display in the modification 2. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an effect mode during variable display in a third modification. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of CPU etc. for presentation control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure showing an example of processing contents of processing (step S90704) of production control command analysis etc. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern specification command processing. It is an example of a change pattern designation command conversion table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under variable display. It is a figure explaining the example of conversion of a fluctuation pattern specification command. It is a figure explaining the example of conversion of the command which designates the change pattern (the execution pattern of change production) of the 2nd reservation display picture.

  A mode for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the back side as the rear (back) side. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is an opposing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, a portion described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. Pachinko gaming machines 1 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as gaming machines) are roughly classified into a gaming board 2 (gauge board) which constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 (a underframe) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2 And consists of. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or LEDs (light emitting diodes) of dot matrix, etc. Special symbols (also referred to as “special figures”) that are plural types of possible identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display or variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B respectively change and display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" . In addition, although the form which makes each of a special symbol a plurality of kinds of identification information which can identify each of a character, a symbol, etc. is illustrated in this example, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, The pattern may be a combination of a plurality of dot displays which is difficult to distinguish or not distinguishable without a certain rule.

  The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), or the type is It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating "00" to "99". .

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 2, an effect display device 5 is provided. The effect display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display Device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A in the special drawing game and the fluctuation display of the second special drawing by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the effect pattern display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, effect patterns which are plural types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this effect pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the variation of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A and the variation of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B being started in the special figure game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) of the effect symbols (also referred to as a decorative symbol) is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special view game, in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 The finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) which is the result of the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display 4A or the special drawing using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 4B In synchronization with the figure game, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and the determined effect symbols that are the result of the variable display are derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivation"). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols means to stop identification information such as effect symbols etc (also referred to as complete stop indication or final stop indication) and to end variable display. . On the other hand, during the fluctuation display until the finalized design pattern is derived and displayed after the fluctuation display of the production pattern is started until the finalized design pattern that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, the fluctuation speed of the production pattern becomes "0". For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed definitively, it is possible for the player to recognize that the fluctuation of the effect pattern by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the effect pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  For example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or “han” or “han” are displayed on the effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, or a combination of a number, English letters, eight character images relating to a predetermined motif, a number or a character or a combination of a symbol and a character image. , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image representing an arbitrary figure). Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the rendering symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. In addition, the production design is not limited to eight types, but it may be any number as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a combination of "big hit" and a combination of "off" (for example, seven types or 9 types etc).

  After the fluctuation display of the production design is started, until the fixed production design that is the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed, each of the production design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow sequentially from the top to the bottom from the one with the highest symbol number to the next, and the effect symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, The effect symbol with the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, the effect symbol display area 5L of "left", etc.), scroll display is performed from the one with the large symbol number to the one with the small symbol, When the effect pattern having the smallest number is displayed, subsequently, the effect pattern having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  At the left end of the display area of the effect display device 5, a pending storage display area 5D is displayed, in which the number of pending storages of variable display (the number of special view pending storages) corresponding to the special view game can be identified. At the center of the lower part of the display unit 5 in the left-right direction, an active display area 5F is displayed, which displays the hold display corresponding to the hold storage during the variable display as the active display. Further, a character image C is displayed at the upper position of the suspension storage display area 5D in the effect display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although details will be described later, a start winning prize effect in which the hold display from the character image C moves toward the hold storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F when a new start winning is generated. It has become executable.

  Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, with the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the start-up winning by (entering). That is, although a start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing a variable display game such as a special view game or a variable display of a production symbol is satisfied, a variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed. If the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc., suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is To be done. In this embodiment, the holding memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening is displayed as a round white display, and the game ball passes the second starting winning opening ( Similarly, the holding storage display generated on the basis of the start winning by the entry) is displayed as a round white display.

  In the following description, the pending storage display area 5D may be referred to as a pending display area, and the pending storage number can be recognized by the number of pending storage displays displayed in the pending storage display area 5D. In the present embodiment, the pending storage display may be referred to as a pending display.

  The pending display in the pending storage display area 5D is generated based on the starting winning by the gaming ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, or the gaming ball passes the second starting winning opening (enter The display mode (for example, the display color or the shape) may be made different depending on whether or not it is generated based on the start-up winning by the. In the present embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous.

  Further, on the upper right of the effect display device 5, together with the holding storage display area 5D, a holding display number correspondence display 31 for displaying the number of holding storages in a specifiable manner by turning on / off of the LED is provided. Incidentally, the hold display number corresponding display 31 of the present embodiment has eight LEDs, and the effect control CPU 120 controls the on / off control of these eight LEDs via the LED control board 14 described later. Although it is configured to be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the LED included in the number-of-hold display corresponding indicator 31 may be turned on / off controlled by the CPU 103.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first holding for specifying the number of special view holding memories in the upper and lower portions of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B together with the holding storage display area A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special view reservation storage number is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended. The second special view reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second to reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular It may refer to a concept including the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages, but excluding the total number of pending storages.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the variation display of the production symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, but in the case of performing the rendering using the presentation display device 5 in this way, for example, In recent years, the effect has been diversified, such as effects such as effects such as effect contents including variable display disappearing from the screen for a moment, effects such as movable objects blocking all or part of the screen being performed, etc. ing. Therefore, even when looking at the display area on the effect display device 5, there are cases where it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the state of fluctuating display. Therefore, for the purpose of eliminating the difficulty in recognizing whether or not the current variable display state is currently present, the fourth display next to the effect design, the special symbol and the normal symbol is displayed on the effect display device 5 4 symbol display area may be provided. These 4th symbols are displayed synchronously with the 1st special symbol variation display, while the 4th symbol variation display for the 1st special symbol is performed, and for 2nd special symbols in synchronization with the 2nd special symbol variation display It is sufficient if the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed. In addition, since the 4th design is always changed and displayed in a fixed operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, it can always be viewed.

  Under the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (usually an electric character) is provided to form a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the game ball may enter more than when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " If it is less than 4 "), the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, and the second special view reserve memory number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, " If it is less than 4 "), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  Further, in the normal winning ball device 6A of the present embodiment, when executing the suspension display notice effect described later, the color corresponding to the display mode of the suspension display or the active display that is the target of the suspension display advance effect. A pending display mode corresponding LED 30 that lights up is built in. Although the on / off control is performed by the effect control CPU 120 via the LED control board 14 described later, the pending display mode corresponding LED 30 in this embodiment is limited to this. The CPU 103 may execute on / off control of the on-hold indication number correspondence indicator 31 instead.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter) I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state where the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning winning ball device 7, the gaming ball is in the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter into the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball to the big winning hole, which is difficult for the player. It is a disadvantageous second state.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol which is a normal symbol (also referred to as "common figure" or "ordinary figure") is variably displayed (variation display). Such a variation display of an ordinary symbol is referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game").

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, besides the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a game ball entering one of the general winning openings is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect LED 9 is provided in the gaming area peripheral portion. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls paid out by lending can be held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A tray (ball hitting supply tray) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The member forming the lower tray is provided with, for example, a stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body. There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling the trigger button.

  A controller sensor unit 35A for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the controller sensor unit 35A is a two transmission type photo sensor (parallel sensor) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to detect the pressing operation from the player mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the arrangement position of the push button 31B or the like, for detecting a pressing operation performed by the player on the push button 31B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various control boards such as a main board 11, a presentation control board 12, a voice control board 13 and an LED control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Also, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure Of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 to control the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric components for presentation such as the game effect LED 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is used for effect such as display operation in the effect display device 5, all or part of audio output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, all or part of lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect LED 9 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component of the above to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The LED control board 14 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the on / off drive in the game effect LED 9 etc. LED driver circuits and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 may have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. It is sufficient if it has. In addition, the main board 11 has a first special symbol display 4A, a second special symbol display 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the special figure game using the second special view in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is variably displayed on each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable symbol display of the special symbol game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies fluctuation patterns (variation time), such as a pattern. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with the designated variation pattern or the like.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a effect pattern. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), in the variable display result specification command, the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is “off” or “big hit” or the change display result is “big hit” Different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plural types the big hit type in the case of “1” is to be set.

  In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a result of a prior determination that the variable display result is "off". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probably big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable big hit B", and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command which designates the fluctuation stop (decision) of the effect pattern in the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is set as the first gaming state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither time reduction control nor probability change control is performed, and time reduction control The second game state designating command corresponding to the gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which the probability change control is not performed is set. In addition, command 9502H is set as a third game state specification command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability change control is performed but time reduction control is not performed (high probability low base state, time reduction none probability change state), command 9503H is time reduction control and probability change The fourth game state designation command corresponds to the game state (high probability high base state, time reduction definite change state) in which the control is performed together.

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a big hit end designation command for specifying the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the jackpot start designation command or the jackpot end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or the jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or short open end big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first starting opening winning combination designating command notifying that a first starting condition for executing a special drawing game using a first special drawing in first special symbol display 4A is established. The command ball 200H is that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the special figure game using the 2nd special figure in the 2nd special symbol indicator 4B was satisfied based on it.

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage count notification command for notifying the first special view storage limit in order to display the special map storage limit in an identifiable manner in the suspension storage display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying of the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the pending storage display area 5D or the like. For example, when the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the first hold storage number notification command is transmitted. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted when, for example, the second starting opening winning combination designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , And is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. In the first reserve memory number notification command and the second reserve memory number notification command, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserve memory decreases), It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among these commands, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a determination result at the time of winning and a determination result of a big hit type (certain change, non certain change, sudden change). In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 is any one of “non-reach”, “super reach”, and “other” variation pattern as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control The RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) for providing an area, the CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and the CPU 103 independently update numerical data indicating random numbers. It comprises the random number circuit 104 to perform and the I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105).

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for special display result determination, a random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, Numerical data representing each of the random value MR4 for display result determination is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 4 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game as the "big hit". It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" as any of the "probably variable big hit A", "probably variable big hit B" and "non-probable change". It is a random value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the rendering symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, "1" to " It takes a value in the range of 997 ".

  The random number value MR4 for determining the common drawing display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is to be “per common drawing” or “to be out of common drawing”. It is a random number value, and takes, for example, values in the range of "3" to "13".

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variation display result is “off”, the variation display is also corresponding to each of the case where the variation display mode of the rendering symbol is “non reach” and the case where the variation display mode is “reach”. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit". In addition, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is "off" and the fluctuation display mode of the rendering pattern is "non-reach" is called non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern"), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the rendering pattern is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the outlier fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “off”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β,... You may provide the normal reach fluctuation pattern of. In addition to the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation patterns super reach α and super reach β. . In addition, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure fluctuation time is set to be longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed. The super reach effect of the super reach α and the super reach effect of the super reach β in the present embodiment are effects in which the character of the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 plays against the enemy character (so-called Battle effect) (see FIG. 41).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined in advance, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Therefore, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, random number values for variation pattern type determination are provided, and these variation pattern types are determined. A fluctuation pattern to be executed from a fluctuation pattern belonging to a fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type since the kind of fluctuation pattern is first determined from a random value It is also possible to determine the emissions.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Also, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data etc. which constitute a fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first and second special views is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. And the second special view may use individual display result determination tables.

  The display result determination table is determined as a variation display result in the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display 4A and the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display 4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the variation display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for the special view display result determination. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, the special view display result according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) or the probability changing state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determination is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "out".

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special view display result determination is the determination result whether to control the special view display result to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit". It is the judgment data to be allocated. In the display result determination table of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), more determination values are “big hit” than in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special view display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" when in the normal state or the time reduction state (low probability state). Then, compared with the probability (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability that it is determined that the special image display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" is higher (about 1/30 in the present embodiment). ). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state (high probability state), there is a probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state to be higher.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the big hit classification determination table of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special view display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", the big hit classification may be any of plural types based on the random number MR2 for big hit classification determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine the In the big hit classification determination table, the special symbol on which the variation display (variation) is performed in the special figure game is the first special figure (the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A) or the second special figure (the second special figure The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment according to whether it is a special figure game by the symbol display 4B is “non-probability change” or “probability change big hit A” It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as.

  Here, the big hit type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 7B. In the present embodiment, high probability control and time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state as the big hit type. There are set a definite variation big hit A or a definite variation big hit B to shift to the high definite base state, and a non-probable variation big hit to execute only the time reduction control to shift to the low certainty high base status after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In the big hit gaming state due to "probable big hit A" and the big hit gaming state due to "non-probable big hit", as described above, 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player 16 rounds), is a regular open jackpot repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state by "probable big hit B", as described above, five times (so-called five rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, "probably big hit A" may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R), and "probably big hit B" may be referred to as 5 rounds (5R).

  The high probability control and the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the definite variation big hit A or the definite variation big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurred again is the definite variation big hit A or the definite variation big hit B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state It is a so-called continuous state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time reduction control to be executed after the end of the big hit gaming state due to "non-deterministic big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) or the predetermined number of special figure games It ends by becoming a big hit game state before is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit classification determination table shown in FIG. 7A, depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the big hit of "probably big hit A" and "prone big hit B" Assignment of judgment values to types is different. That is, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable variation big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special drawing game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. And if the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. And, it is possible to make the proportion of determining the jackpot type “a certainty big hit B” with a small number of rounds different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is controlled to the short open jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probably variable big hit B". In the gaming state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, avoiding frequent occurrences of short-term opening big hit state with few winning balls obtained and lowering the game entertaining Can be prevented.

  In the setting example of the jackpot classification determination table shown in FIG. 7A, the allocation of the judgment value to the jackpot classification of “non-probability change” is whether the fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing Therefore, the probability of becoming a non-probability big hit and the probability of becoming a big hit are the same regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to the "probable variation big hit B" differs depending on whether the variation feature is the first special view or the second special view, "certainly variation big hit A" The assignment of the judgment value to “” also differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the variation special figure is the second special figure for “probable variation big hit A” with a large number of rounds. Is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special view.

  In addition, even when the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing, the judgment value of the predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing is assigned to the big hit type of “probably variable big hit B” May be For example, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, a smaller judgment value may be assigned to the jackpot type “probable variation big hit B” as compared to the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, determination of the jackpot type may be performed with reference to common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the variation pattern is one of the plurality of types described above according to the result of the prior determination. Decide on one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the special figure display result is "big hit", and the special figure display result is "off" A deviation change pattern determination table to be used when it is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

  In the fluctuation pattern determination table for the big hit, each fluctuation pattern of normal reach big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β big fluctuation fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. In the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “probability big hit A” or “probable big hit B”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of big hit is “non-probable big hit”. In this case, the super reach α is assigned so that it is easy to be determined, and when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, it does not become “positively variable big hit A” or “positively variable big hit B” This can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, it is used when the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used when the number of pending storages is 1 or less and when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. If the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8, and the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed And the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table D used in advance.

  In the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A, the non-reach outlier fluctuation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), the super reach With respect to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation, a predetermined random value is allocated as a judgment value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) corresponding to a total of 2 to 4 pending storages, a fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and a super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Also, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortening non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take on the fluctuation pattern of reach α (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β (PA2-3). It is done. Moreover, in the fluctuation pattern determination table D for loss, the fluctuation pattern (PA 1-4) of shortening, non-reach loss, corresponding fluctuation pattern (PA 2-1) of normal reach, fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation during time-saving control (PA2-2) The super reach β is assigned a predetermined random number value as a determination value within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the variation time of the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation pattern (PA1) is further reduced. The fluctuation time is shorter in the non-reach-out fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) than in -2). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach out of bounds variation pattern is determined so that the variation time is short, so that the pending storage is easily digested and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4 In addition to making a start-up winning when not being held, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start-up that is not made pending storage, and when the number of pending storages is reduced, the fluctuation time is not long and the non-reach is not shifted By determining the pattern (PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fluctuation display not being executed by lengthening the time of the fluctuation display.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source which is partially or entirely produced on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). Ru. In particular, at least the data according to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special map process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a special view reserve storage unit 151A, a general drawing reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control counter setting unit A game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided.

  The special figure reserve storage unit 151A is a special figure that is not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first start winning) occurs. The game ball passes (enters) the reserve data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) and the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Although the start winning combination (second starting winning combination) has occurred, the reserved data of the special drawing game (special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display 4B) but not started is stored. As an example, special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the detection order of the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the winning of the gaming ball is the first starting Start-up winning type data indicating whether it is a winning opening or a winning to the second starting winning opening, a random number value for special view display result determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the winning of the gaming ball MR1 or a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. are stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). The reserve data stored in the special view reserve storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view or the second special view is suspended, and the variation display result in the special view game ( It becomes holding information which makes it possible to determine whether or not a special map display result is to be a big hit.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 For example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numeric data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, etc., and the random number for indicating the random value independently of the CPU 120 for effect control A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes a wire for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5 and a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating LED data to the LED control board 14 is connected.

  In addition, also on the side of the effect control board 12, similarly to the main board 11, for example, random number values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining types of various effects such as advance notice effects are set.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that configures a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, and pattern data that configures various effect control patterns. There is.

  As an example, the ROM 121 is used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the effect model). The effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be stored is stored. The effect control pattern is configured of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed Composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operation of production pattern, reach production, effect display operation in re-lottery production, etc. or various production display operations without variable display of production pattern It is done. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress status of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  For example, a plurality of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different may be included in the special figure change time effect control pattern, for example, for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  As an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation, the RAM 122 mounted on the rendering control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is, for example, a rendering control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 9A. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 9A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, etc. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the effect display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 9B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the start winning combination reception command buffer 194A, storage areas (entries corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total pending storage number are provided.

  In each storage area (entry), whether the starting winning combination corresponding to the entry corresponds to the winning to the first starting winning opening, or corresponds to the winning to the second starting winning opening An area for storing a starting opening winning combination designation command (a first starting opening winning combination designation command, a second starting opening winning combination designation command) capable of specifying a, an area for storing a symbol specification command, an area for storing a variation category command, There is an area for storing the pending storage number notification command.

  Furthermore, in the start winning combination reception command buffer 194A of this embodiment, the determination of the display pattern associated with the determination of the presence / absence of execution of the suspension display previewing effect in the suspension display previewing effect determining process (FIG. 22) described later is undecided Whether or not, that is, by the occurrence of a new start winning, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol specification command, the variation category specification command, and the pending storage number notification command are newly stored, and the determination of the display pattern is not yet determined. A pending display flag indicating that there is a display undecided flag and a flag value corresponding to the pending storage display pattern (display mode), and a flag according to the final mode of the pending display display pattern (display mode) A change destination flag in which a value is set is secured for each storage area (entry).

  In the hold display flag, “0” corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display preview effect is not determined in the hold display advance notice effect determination process described later. By this, the pending storage display of the normal display mode (for example, white ○) is displayed in the pending storage display area 5D, and it is different from the normal display mode when the execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. By setting “1” (square (◇)) or “2” (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending storage display of the special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) , A special aspect of the pending storage display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the pending storage display area 5D, and there is a high possibility of becoming a big hit or becoming a super reach in the variable display corresponding to the pending storage display about It is adapted to be notice.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are the contents of the pending storage at which the start condition is satisfied when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number “1”) is started Data is moved to and cleared from the active display storage buffer 194B in FIG. 9C, and the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the cleared storage area (entry) are stored one by one higher It is supposed to be shifted to the area.

  As described above, when the variable display of the pending storage (buffer number "1") is started, the contents (data) of the pending storage for which the start condition is satisfied are moved to the active display storage buffer 194B. Since the data is overwritten and updated, as shown in FIG. 9C, a storage area similar to the start winning time reception command buffer 194A is provided. That is, an area for storing start opening winning combination designation command, an area for storing symbol designation command, an area for storing variation category command, an area for storing pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing display undecided flag An area for storing the display mode flag and an area for storing the change destination flag are provided. Although details will be described later, when there is a pending storage in which “0” is set as the value of the display mode flag and “1” or “2” is set as the value of the change destination flag, As the value of the change destination flag is set as the value of the display mode flag by the action effect processing being executed during the execution of the variable display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the pending storage may change. .

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal drawing game has ended, after the normal drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied, the normal symbol display 20 The popular figure game by is started.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time elapses, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if an ordinary symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7" as the determined normal symbol, the variation display result of the ordinary symbol is "generally out of alignment". Become. In response to the variation display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, after the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, by detecting the gaming ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the regular winning ball device 6A by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the previous special drawing game or the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, the second starting condition is established because the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, after starting the variation display of the special symbol, when the variation display time as the special figure variation time elapses, the variation display of the special symbol The finalized special symbol (special drawing display result) to be the result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It becomes "off". In addition, a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) as a result of the predetermined display is stopped and displayed. The small hit game state may be controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as a "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are used as a big hit symbol, and special symbols indicating the symbol “-” are removed from the symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol or an outset symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol indicator 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or an off symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is put into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16” or the like). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round may be ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win a prize winning opening etc.) .

  Among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open It is also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that become the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the number of "7" become the big hit symbols corresponding to the probability variation big hit A described later, and "5" The special symbol indicating a number is the jackpot symbol corresponding to the probability variation big hit B described later. In the big hit gaming state (normally open big hit state) controlled after the big hit symbol of "3" or "7" is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning winning ball device 7 The special variable winning is achieved by opening the big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. A round of changing the ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed a first number of times (for example, 16 times). In addition, the normally open jackpot state is also referred to as a first specified gaming state.

  In addition, among the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that become the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the number of "3" become the big hit symbols corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit described later, and special variable The special winning opening door of the winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. By changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player by opening the state, the same round as the probability variation big hit A is repeated the first number of times (for example, 16 times) .

  Among the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that will be the big hit symbols as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, it is controlled after the special symbol showing the number of "5" is derived In the jackpot gaming state (short-term opening jackpot state), the upper limit time to change the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round (during the period when the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door) The upper limit is the same as the predetermined period in the normally open big hit state, but the round for changing the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is the first number of times in the normally open big hit state For example, it is repeatedly executed a second number of times (e.g., 5 times) less than 16 times). In addition, the short-term opening big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In these short-term open big hit states, although the form which made the number of rounds 5 times which is the 2nd number is illustrated, the number of rounds is made the same as the 1st number (for example, 16 times) in a normal open big hit state. On the other hand, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in each round after a predetermined number (for example 6) (upper limit of the period for making the big winning opening open by the big winning opening door) The number of rounds substantially may be made smaller than that of the normally open big hit state by setting the) as a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normally open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the normal open big hit state, it is only necessary to be a big hit state where the expected value of the balls (prize balls) that can be obtained is smaller than that of the normal open big hit state. In addition, in these short-term opening big-hit states, it is not possible to substantially get out balls (prize balls) by setting the opening period of the big winning opening to the second period (0.1 second etc.) for all rounds. It is good also as a big hit game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state, the period for changing the big winning opening in each round to the first state where the gaming ball is easy to pass (enter) is from the first period in the normal opening round specified gaming state Also, it is normally open by at least one of the short second period and the fact that the number of round executions is the second round number less than the first round number in the special opening round specific gaming state. It is sufficient if there are fewer available balls (prize balls) than the jackpot state.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A In response to the start of one of the special drawing games of the second special symbol display 4B and the special drawing game using the second special drawing, the variable display of the effect design is started. And the period from when fluctuation display of the production design is started until fluctuation display ends with the stop display of the fixed production design in each production design display area 5L, 5C and 5R of “left”, “middle”, “right” In such a case, the variable display state of the effect pattern may be in a predetermined reach state.

  Here, with the reach state, when the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the effect pattern is not displayed yet and stopped (“reach variation symbol” The display state in which the fluctuation continues, or the display state in which all or part of the effect pattern changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in "left", "middle", "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) in advance The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, "inside") which is not displayed as stopped when the effect symbols (for example, effect symbols indicating alphanumeric characters of "7") constituting the determined big hit combination are stopped and displayed In the symbol display area 5C, etc.) The display condition in which the effect pattern is fluctuating, or the effect pattern is a big hit in all or a part of the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display state which fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

  In addition, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the production design is reduced, or a character image (production image imitating a person or the like) different from the production design is displayed in the display area of the production display device 5 Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing / displaying a moving image different from the effect pattern, or changing the change mode of the effect pattern, the effect operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed. May be Such a rendering operation such as display of character images, change in display mode of background image, reproduction display of moving images, and change in change mode of effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect LED 9, etc. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is performed.

  As an example, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are set in advance. And, when the reach mode of the super reach such as the super reach α and the super reach β appears, the fluctuation display result may become “big hit” compared to the case where the reach mode of the normal reach appears (big hit expectation) Becomes higher. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the reach mode of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β, when super reach β appears, the variable display result is “big hit” than when super reach α appears. The big hit expectation is high (big hit expectation: super reach β> super reach α> normal reach).

  In the present embodiment, as described later, in the reach, the fluctuation time is set so that super reach β> super reach α> normal reach (see FIG. 5), and as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the big hit Expectations are getting higher.

  Unlike the reach effect, the fluctuation display state of the production symbol may reach the reach state, and the fluctuation display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo series” may be executed to notify the player by the variable display mode of the effect pattern or the like. It may be determined whether or not to execute the “slip” and “pseudo-link” variation display effects in response to the variation pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. In addition, regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side, whether or not to execute the variation display effect of “slip” may be determined on the side of the effect control substrate 12 or not.

  Unlike the variable display effects such as reach effects during the variable display of the effect pattern, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image or sound output as a message, lighting an LED, etc., of the effect pattern It is possible that the fluctuation display state of the production design may reach the reach state by the rendering operation different from the fluctuation display operation, that the reach effect by the super reach may be executed, and the fluctuation display result is "big hit" An advance notice effect may be executed to inform the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming The production operation to be the notice production is the fluctuation display state of the production design after the fluctuation display of the production design is started in all of the production design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right". It is sufficient if it is executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the left and right rendering symbol display areas 5L and 5R display the rendering symbol temporarily). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the rendering symbol is in the reach state.

  Among the advance notice effects, the one to be the hold display advance notice effect may be included. The pending display advance presentation effect is based on the change of the display mode such as the pending display of the special drawing game before the possibility of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" etc. starts the variable display to be the subject to be previewed. This is a suggested notice effect. In particular, the effect of continuously notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is continuously notified over a continuous notice effect (continuous Also referred to as production). In addition, while the special figure game is executed once, after temporarily displaying the effect pattern temporarily, the effect display is again performed a predetermined number of times to cause the effect pattern to change again (simulated continuous change, re-fluctuating), and artificially In a game machine that performs "pseudo-reed" variable display effects that appear as if multiple variable displays are being performed, the variable display result is "big hit" over the pseudo multiple variable displays. An advance notice effect for continuously giving notice of possibility and the like is also included in the continuous notice effect (continuous effect).

  When a special symbol to be the out symbol is displayed as a stop (derived) as a final special symbol in the special figure game, the variation display state of the representation symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the representation symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed effect design that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (usually referred to as "normally off") variation display mode when the variation display result is "off".

  When a special symbol to be the out symbol is displayed as a stop (derived) as a final special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed or the reach effect is not performed, the predetermined effect pattern which is a combination of the predetermined reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a fluctuation display result of the effect pattern is referred to as a fluctuation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach failure”) when the fluctuation display result is “off”.

  If the big hit symbol indicating the number "3" is displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game as the special symbol to be the big hit symbol, the variation display state of the production symbol corresponds to the reach state. Then, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed effect pattern to be a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") is displayed in a stopped state among a plurality of types of big hit combinations. The reach effect may not be executed, and the non-probable variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect pattern.

  The determined effect design that is usually a big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is variably displayed, for example, in each of the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5 Among the effect symbols of symbol numbers “1” to “8”, any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are even “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” is “left” or “left” It may be any as long as it is aligned and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "middle" and "right". The effect symbols having symbol numbers of "2", "4", "6" and "8" which usually constitute a big hit combination are usually referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as "non-probable variation symbols").

  In response to the determined special symbol in the special figure game becoming a big hit symbol normally, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed effect symbol of the big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “usually big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, you may stop-display the big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) normally as a fixed production pattern, without a reach production being performed. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-deterministic change", it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the variation display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, as described later, so-called electric Chu support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normally variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, etc., and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state where the initialization process is performed is performed. In the time-saving control, either of the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variation display result being a "big hit", either condition is established first When it is done, you should finish.

  Among the special symbols that will be the big hit symbols as a final symbol in the special figure game, when the probability change big hit symbols such as the special symbols showing the number “7” are stopped and displayed, the variation display state of the effect symbols is in the reach state In response to becoming, after the same reach effect as when the variation display mode of the production design is "normal" execution is executed, among the big hit combination of plural types, the definite production design which becomes the certain probability variation big hit combination May be stopped. Note that the reach effect may not be executed, and the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect pattern. For example, the fixed effect symbols that will be the probability variation big hit combination have symbol numbers “1” that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5, for example. Among the effect symbols of “8”, the effect symbols whose symbol number is “7” among the effect symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” predetermined effective lines in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. What is necessary is just the one displayed on top and stopped. A production symbol whose symbol number "7" constitutes a combination of a probability variation big hit is called a probability variation symbol. When a probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a determined special symbol in a special figure game, a fixed effect symbol that is usually a big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the created symbol.

  Among the special symbols that will be short-term opening round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in the special drawing game, when the probability variation big hit symbols such as the special symbols showing the number “5” are stopped and displayed, the variation display state of the production symbols is In response to reaching the reach state, after the same reach effect as when the variation display mode of the effect design is "normal" is executed, it becomes a certain probability variation big hit combination among multiple types of big hit combinations The fixed effect design may be stopped and displayed. Note that the reach effect may not be executed, and the probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect pattern. For example, the fixed effect symbols that will be the probability variation big hit combination have symbol numbers “1” that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5, for example. Among the effect symbols of "8", any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are "1", "3" and "5" other than "7" are "left", "middle" and "right" What is necessary is just to be displayed on the predetermined effective line in each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and to be stopped and displayed. The effect symbols having symbol numbers “1”, “3”, and “5” that constitute the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols in the same manner as the effect symbols having “7” described above. It should be noted that, when a definite variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in a special figure game, a fixed effect symbol that is usually a big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the created symbol. Good.

  The variation display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the final special symbol in the special figure game is the variation display result is "big hit" regardless of whether the finalization design is usually a big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination. It is referred to as a variation display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “certain change” in a case. In the present embodiment, among the jackpot types of "probability", based on the "big hit" in the variable display result of "7" as the determined special symbol, it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and the end thereof Later, probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with time-saving control. On the other hand, it is controlled to the short-term open jackpot state based on the "big hit" in the variable display result of "5" as the confirmed special symbol among the big hit type of "certain change", and after that end, the time saving control Stochastic change control (probability change control) is performed.

  The probability variation control result (special figure display result) becoming "big hit" in the special figure game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state by performing these probability change control. The probability change control may be ended when the condition that the variation display result becomes “big hit” after the end of the big hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state is controlled again is satisfied. As with the time saving control, when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times same as the time shortening or 90 times different from the time shortening) after the end of the big hit gaming state, the probability change control ends May be In addition, even if the probability change control is ended when it is determined that the probability change control is to be ended in the probability change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, even if the probability change control is ended. Good.

  When time saving control is performed, control to make the variation time (general figure variation time) of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 20 shorter than that in the normal state, or the variation of the normal symbol in each regular drawing game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per common view" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. By increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied, control (power-chute support control) that is advantageous to the player is performed. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is easily established, and the special drawing game can be executed frequently, so that The time until the variable display result is a "big hit" is shortened. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. The gaming state in which time-saving control or high opening control is performed along with the probability variation control is also referred to as high-probability high-base state. In the present embodiment, although the game state to be controlled is not set, the probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. In addition, only the gaming state in which time saving control and high open control are performed together with probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability state", and in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base status, it may be referred to as a time reduction probability variation state. On the other hand, in order to distinguish from the high probability high base state, the positive variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and short time control or high open control is not performed may be referred to as time short non definite variable state. The short time state in which time saving control or high open control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time reduction control and probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game can be executed frequently, and the probability that the variation display result in the special figure game of each time will be a "big hit" Is enhanced for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state is also referred to as a special game state.

  The re-lottery effect may be executed during the change display of the effect pattern in which the determined effect pattern is a non-probable variation big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, for example, after the temporary left-handed display of the effect design that is usually a big hit combination in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the effect display device 5, for example "," "In the" right "effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R again in the state that the same effect pattern is aligned, and production symbol (probable variation symbol) and a big hit usually become a probability variation big hit combination One of the effect symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is displayed as a finalized effect symbol (stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, the effect pattern which is temporarily stopped and displayed is temporarily changed as the re-lottery effect. It is sufficient if the re-lottery defeat presentation effect is derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “certain change”, the re-variation effect pattern that is temporarily stopped is re-varied as the re-lottery effect. The re-lottery winning effect for stopping and displaying the symbol may be performed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be performed.

  After the fixed effect pattern that is usually a big hit combination (non-probable variation big hit combination) is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round at the start of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state, any round ends in the big hit gaming state The period between the start of the next round and the period between the end of the last round in the jackpot gaming state and the start of the next variable display game, etc. A big hit during the jackpot promotion effect to be a notification effect may be executed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion".

  In the jackpot promotion promotion, there is no jackpot promotion promotion production that announces that there is a promotion in which the gaming state becomes a definite change state despite the confirmed production symbol being usually a big hit combination, and that there is no promotion in a definite change state There is a jackpot promotion failure production to notify. For example, in the jackpot promotion promotion, the production pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the production display device 5 and either one of the normal symbol and the probability symbol is stopped and displayed as the production display result, or the fluctuation display of the production design It is sufficient to inform the player of the presence or absence of the promotion to be a probability change state by displaying different effect images.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer disposed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13 ).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (S14). Thereafter, CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing is executed (S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example of these, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the state to the off state or the like, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 10 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning process (S21). After executing the start winning process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of S22 to S29 in accordance with the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  In the start winning process of S21, as shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S101). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (S101; Y), the number of first special view pending storages, which is the number of pending storages of the special view game using the first special view, has a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is obtained (S102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the storage value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. For example, when the number of first to-be-stored storages is not the upper limit in S102 (S102; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S103) .

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off at S101 (S101; N), or when the number of first special view storage blocks has reached the upper limit at S102 (S102; Y), the normally variable winning ball device Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (S104). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (S104; Y), the second special view pending storage number, which is the pending storage number of the special view game using the second special view, has a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is obtained (S105). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit value in S105 (S105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S106) .

  After one of the processes of S103 and S106 is executed, the number of to-be-saved special figure storages according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (S107). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to add one (S108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the process of S108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination or the big hit type determination among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (S109). The numerical data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the free space entry in the special map storage unit by being set as storage information (S110).

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment and the random number value MR2 for the big hit classification judgment is whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is "big hit", and further the fluctuation display result It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "big hit". Random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern decision, is used in order to decide the fluctuation pattern which includes the fluctuation indicatory time of special design and the production design. The CPU 103 executes the process of S109 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for the determination of the variation display mode including the variation display result of the special symbol and the presentation symbol and the variation display time.

  Subsequent to the process of S110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning combination designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (S111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning combination designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designation command is performed. The start opening prize winning specification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Be done.

  Following the process of S111, a winning random number value determination process is executed (S112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 The setting for this is performed (S113). For example, after the special symbol process processing is finished, the command control processing of S17 shown in FIG. 10 is executed to transmit the main storage 11 to the effect control board 12 after the special symbol process processing is finished. Be done.

  After the process of S113 is performed, it is determined whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" (S114). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is “1” (Y in S114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (S115), and the processing proceeds to S104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N in S114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and the starting winning processing is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S112 of FIG. 12 as random number value determination processing at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and effect symbols is started, special pattern display processing (S22 of FIG. 11, FIG. 15) to be described later "special pattern display results (special symbols of variable display results)" A determination is made as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as a "big hit". Further, in a variation pattern setting process (S23 in FIG. 11, FIG. 16) to be described later, determination of a variation pattern, etc. specifically defining the variation display mode of the rendering symbol is performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the in-winning random number value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Thus, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special view display result, and whether or not the variation display mode of the rendering symbol is the predetermined display mode with the super reach. As a result, it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol and the effect design based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning opening is started, that is, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variation display. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "big hit" or which category of the variation display mode of the effect design will be the variation display mode, and based on this determination result, by the effect control CPU 120 etc. As will be described later, the pending display notice effect is performed.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 13A, the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example. The present gaming state in is identified (S121). The CPU 103 identifies the definite variation state when the definite variation flag is on, and identifies the short time status when the definite variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off. At times, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

  Following the process of S121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 6 is selected and set (S122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination extracted in S109 of FIG. 12 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (S123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special display display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of S122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be "big hit".

  When it is determined in S123 that the jackpot is not within the judgment range, that is, when it is judged that the jackpot will not be a jackpot at the time of the fluctuation display (S123; N), the symbol according to the fluctuation display result becoming "off" The transmission setting of the designated command is executed (S124), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (S125). If the time saving flag is not set (S125; N), the variation pattern determination table A for removal is selected and set, and if the time saving flag is set (S125; Y), the variation pattern determination table for removal Select D and set (S127).

  Note that the release variation pattern determination table A is a release variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending storages is one or less. Further, the variation pattern determination table for disconnection D is a variation pattern determination table for disconnection which is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern determination table A for removal and the variation pattern determination table D for removal, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4. B and a variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but among these variation pattern determination tables A to C for deviation, variation for deviation In the pattern determination table A, values from 0 to A within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination are allocated to non-reach variation patterns, and in the variation pattern determination tables B and C for loss A value exceeding 0 to A within the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patternOn the other hand, in the out-of-plane fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, values from B to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of super reach among the range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination.

  For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A in S126, the determination of non-reach and super-reach must always be non-reach or super-reach even if the number of pending storages changes after the determination. Since the variation pattern is set, the determination at the time of the start winning is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for losing.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, if it is determined in S123 that the jackpot determination range is in effect, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot will be a variation display (S123; Y), for jackpot type determination Based on the random value MR2, the jackpot type is determined (S128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special view (the “first special view” corresponding to “1” or the “second special view” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start opening buffer value. The table data for determining the big hit type is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

  Also, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the big hit type determined in S128 is executed (S129), and the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern to any one of a plurality It sets (S130).

  After performing any of the processes of S126, S127, and S130, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of S126, S127, and S130 and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are used. The variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined (S131). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13B, when at least the variation display result is “off”, the variation category in which the variation display mode is “non-reach” in common regardless of the total number of pending storages And a variation category that is a variation display mode of "super reach", and a variation category of "other" that is a variation display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non reach" and "super reach". It is only necessary to determine whether or not such a change category is determined based on

  Then, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result by the process of S131 (S132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  The special symbol normal processing of S22 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether to start the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B based on the presence or absence of the reserve data stored in the special view reserve storage unit 151, etc. It is determined whether or not it is not. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special image display result determination, whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect pattern is "big hit" Make a decision (pre-decision) before being displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variation display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B (big hit symbol or One of the off symbols is set. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern can be selected from any of a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination based on the result of the prior determination of whether or not the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It includes the process of deciding whether or not. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing of S22 and the variation pattern setting processing of S23, a variation pattern including the variation display time of the finalized special symbol, the special symbol and the effect symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing use the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. Processing for determining the variable display mode of

  The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 4A and the second special symbol indicator 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of S24 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 Whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the special symbol display 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B, it is progressed by a common timer A measurement of time is taken. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of S24 is the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol indicator 4A, and the second special figure in the second special symbol indicator 4B. It is sufficient that the process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the symbol is controlled by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of S25 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variation display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the fluctuation indication result becoming “big hit” and the like, the processing etc which does the setting in order to start execution of the round in big hit game state and open the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set according to whether the big hit type is “non-probable big hit”, “positively big hit A”, or “positively big hit B”. May be As an example, regardless of the big hit type, while setting the upper limit of the period which makes the big winning a prize opening state to "29 seconds", the opening frequency of the big winning a prize opening which becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round In the case of “or“ probable variation big hit A ”, setting to“ 16 times ”may be performed to set the normally open big hit state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probable big hit B,” setting the number of open big wins, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, to “five times” sets the short open jackpot state You should be At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of S27 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "5". The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of S28 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect is performed as a rendering operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the rendering display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the gaming effect LED 9, etc. The process includes a process of waiting until the passage of time has elapsed, and a process of performing various settings (setting of a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) for starting the probability change control or the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  In the big hit end processing, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read out, and the big hit type is “non-probable variation big hit”, “probably variation big hit A”, “certain variation big hit B” Identify if there was. Then, if it is determined that the identified jackpot type is not "non-probable variation big hit", setting (setting of a probability variation flag) for starting the probability variation control is performed.

  In addition, when the specified big hit type is “non-probable variation big hit”, the setting for starting the time reduction control (preset corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable during the setting of the time reduction flag and time reduction control) A predetermined count initial value ("100" in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S22 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first determines whether the total number of pending storages is "0" (S141). For example, in the process of S141, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the total special drawing reserve storage number is "0" in S141, the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if the total special map reserve storage number is not "0" at S141 (S141; N), the first reserve data stored corresponding to reserve number "1" in special view reserve storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the start-up winning type is “first”, that is, whether the first hold data stored corresponding to the hold number “1” is due to the first start-up winning.

  If the start winning type of the first hold data is "first" (S142; Y), the special symbol pointer is updated to "first" and then the process proceeds to S145 (S143), the start hold of the first hold data If the type is "second" (S142; N), the special symbol pointer is updated to "second" and then the process proceeds to S145 (S144).

  In S145, the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination, the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are shown as reserve data stored corresponding to the reserve number "1". Read each numerical data. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequently to the processing of S145, the value of the holding storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer is decremented by one, and the data of the special view holding storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the hold indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to hold numbers “2” to “8”) in special view hold storage unit 151A. The data is shifted upward by one entry (S146).

  Next, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (S147), transmission setting of the pending storage number specifying command indicated by the special symbol pointer is performed, and the process proceeds to S149 (S148). For example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command storage process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 is executed to transmit the number-of-held-memory-number designation commands thus set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Be done.

  In S149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 6 is selected as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "off". set. Subsequently, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special view display result of "big hit" or "off". Then, it is determined whether the special view display result is to be "big hit" or "off" (S150). In S150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state in which the probability change flag is set, if the random number value MR1 for the special view display result determination falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, the "big hit" If it does not correspond, it is determined as "detachment". In the low probability state in which the probability change flag is not set, if the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not falls off, "off" It is determined that

  As described above, in the special view display result determination table selected in S149, since different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" corresponding to the gaming state (high probability, low probability) at that time, S150 In the processing of the special figure display result “big hit using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display such as the special figure game is started is in high probability state If the gaming state is in the high certainty state, it is determined that the "big hit" is more likely than in the low certainty state.

  After the special view display result is determined in S150, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (S151). When it is determined that the "big hit" (S151; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7A is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (S153). By referring to the jackpot type judgment table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment stored in the random number buffer for variation, and "non-probability" and "probability variable A" in the jackpot type judgment table In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of “probable variation B”, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of S154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state in any of the gaming state among the time saving state and the probability changing state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the time saving state. Whether to control is determined before the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S155), the jackpot type determined Remember. As an example, the big hit type buffer value is set to “0” if the big hit type is “non-probable change” corresponding to the non-probable change big hit, “0” for the positive change big hit A, “1”, the positive change big hit B If it is a "probable variation B" corresponding to, it may be "2".

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" is not made in S151 (S151; N), the process proceeds to S156.

  In S156, according to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is set), further, according to the decision result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state Set a special symbol. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" which becomes an out symbol is set as a finalized special symbol corresponding to a preliminary determination result indicating that the special image display result is "off". In addition, if it is determined in S151 that the special view display result is "big hit", the big hit symbol is "3", "5", or "7" according to the big hit type determination result in S154. Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result of making the jackpot type "non-probability change". In addition, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "probable variation A", a special symbol indicating a number of "7" is set as a confirmed special symbol. A special symbol indicating the number of "5" is set as the finalized special symbol according to the determination result of making the jackpot type "probable variation B".

  After setting the finalized special symbol in S156, the special symbol process processing is updated to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (S157), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S23 of FIG. 11 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (S161). Then, if the big hit flag is on (S161; Y), the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (S162).

  When the big hit flag is off in S161 (S161; N), for example, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (is set), etc. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is performed while the state is the definite variation state or the time saving state (S163). Then, if the time saving flag is on (S163; Y), the out-changing variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types (S164).

  On the other hand, when the time saving control is not being performed, that is, when the time saving flag is off (not set) (S163; N), for example, the total hold storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 The total pending storage number is specified by reading stored values, and it is determined whether the specified total pending storage number is 2 or more (S165).

  If the total number of pending storages specified is not 2 or more (S165; N), the out-use fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of a plurality of types (S165; N) S166).

  If the specified total pending storage number is two or more (S165; Y), the process proceeds to S167 to further determine whether the total pending storage number is five or more (S167).

  If the total number of pending storages is not 5 or more (S167; N), the out-use variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (S168) .

  Further, when the total number of pending storages is 5 or more (S167; Y), the out-use fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern as any of a plurality of types. (S169).

  After performing any of S162, S164, S166, S168, and S169, for example, it is selected based on numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like. The variation pattern is determined to be any of a plurality of types by referring to either the jackpot variation pattern determination table or the release variation pattern determination tables A to D (S170).

  In addition, when the big hit flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of S170, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display mode of the rendering symbol is to be "reach". That is, the process of S170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the rendering symbol is to be the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

  After the variation pattern is determined in S170, according to the variation special figure designation buffer value, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A, and the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display 4B In order to start one of the special drawing games using the special drawing, the setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (S171). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of S171, setting is performed to transmit various commands used for the start of variation of the special symbol (S172). For example, when the fluctuation special view designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command to the effect control board 12, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is In the transmission command buffer provided in, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command to the effect control board 12, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a fluctuation display result. In order to sequentially transmit a designated command and a second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. In the buffer area.

  After the process of S172 is executed, a special figure fluctuation time which is a fluctuation display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (S173). The special figure fluctuation time that is the special symbol fluctuation display time is the time required from the start of the special symbol fluctuation in the special drawing game until the finalized special symbol that is the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) is derived and displayed It is. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (S174), and the variation pattern setting processing is ended.

  Every time the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 10 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed based on the command transmission setting in S172, the main board 11 transmits a command to the game control state specification command to the effect control board 12 A first change start command or a second change start command, a change pattern specification command, a change display result specification command, a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is first transmitted, the first change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern specification command The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S25 of FIG. 11 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process of S24 to end the variation of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol indicator 4B. Control for deriving and displaying a symbol is performed (S181). In addition, when the fluctuation special drawing specification buffer value is “1” indicating the first special drawing, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special drawing specification buffer value is In the case of "2" indicating the second special figure, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 4B is ended. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (S 182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (S183), and if the big hit flag is not set (S183; N), the process proceeds to S190.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is set (S183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the positive change flag and the short time flag (S184) if the positive change flag or the short time flag is set (S184). Set according to the stored big hit type 1 to send the big hit start 1 specified command (positive variable A), the big hit start 2 specified command (positive variable B), the big hit start 3 specified command (not positive variable) (S185 ).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designating command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (S186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 5) is set in the big hit display time timer (S187). Further, the number of opening times (for example, 16 times in the case of non probability variation big hit or probability variation big hit A, 5 times in case of probability variation big hit B) is set in the special winning opening open number counter (S188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S26) (S189).

  On the other hand, in step S190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. If the value of the time saving number counter is “0” (S190; Y), the process proceeds to S196.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S190; N), that is, if it is a high base state in which the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (S191) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (S193). If it is not "0" (S193; N), the process proceeds to S196 and the value of the time reduction counter is "0." If it is "" (S193; Y), the game state corresponding to the set state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag (specifically, low probability) after clearing the time saving flag to end time saving control (S194) After the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the low base) is performed (S195), the process proceeds to S196.

  In S196, after updating the value of the special drawing process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S29 of FIG. 11 as the big hit end process.

  In the big hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (S201). When the big hit end display timer is not in operation (S201; N), the big hit end display timer, the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time to display the big hit end on the effect display device 5 (big hit end display time) The setting is made (S204), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is in operation (S201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (S205). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (S206). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (S206; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored big hit type is the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B (S207).

  If the jackpot type is the definite variation big hit A or the definite variation big hit B (S207; Y), the definite variation flag is set (S208), the short time flag is set (S209), and “0” is set to the hour reduction counter (S210) The process proceeds to S213.

  On the other hand, if the big hit type is not a definite variation big hit A or a definite variation big hit B (S207; N), S211 and S212 are executed to set a short time flag and set "100" to the short time counter, and then S213. Go to

  In S213, the jackpot flag is cleared, and transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is performed (S214). Then, after performing transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and the time saving flag (S215), the special figure process flag is processed as a special symbol normal processing It updates to "0" which is a value corresponding to (S216).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main processing, when the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main substrate 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 5.

  Next, an effect random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating effect random numbers such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S54 of FIG. 18 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (S221). At this time, if there is no reception command (S221; N), the command analysis processing is ended.

  If there is a received command at S221 (S221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command (S222) ). Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designating command (S222; Y), the first holding storage number notification waiting time is set (S223). For example, in the process of S223, if the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 Good.

  If it is determined in S222 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command (S222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (S224). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designating command (S224; Y), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (S225). For example, in the process of S225, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command at S224 (S224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designating command (S226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at S226 (S226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (S227). If it is determined in S227 that the received command is not a change category command (S227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (S228). When it is the first pending storage number notification command (S228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (S229).

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command in S228 (S228; N), it is determined whether the receiving command is the second pending storage number notification command (S230). Then, when it is the second pending storage number notification command (S230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (S231).

  Then, after executing any of the processes of S229 and S231, "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undecided is set in the display undecided flag of the stored entry (S232).

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in S226 (S226; Y), or if the received command is a variation category command in S227 (S227; Y), or any one of S223, S225, and S232 is executed. After that, the reception command is stored at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (not shown) (S233), and the process returns to S221.

  If the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the start winning at reception command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage count notification command in S230 (S230; N), after setting according to the other received commands (S234), the process returns to S221.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S55) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold effect process for executing control of effects relating to a hold display or an active display (S72).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the processes in S73 to S79 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed.

  Fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether a fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 or not. Specifically, it is checked in the command analysis process whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received. If the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start process (S74).

  Effect pattern fluctuation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the change of effect pattern is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S75).

  During the effect symbol fluctuation process (S75): While controlling the switching timing and the like of each fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76).

  Effect pattern fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the fact that the effect control command (pattern confirmation command) instructing all symbol stop is received, the fluctuation of the effect pattern is stopped and the control to derive and display the display result (stop pattern) Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77) or the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game (S78).

  During the big hit game processing (S78): Control during the big hit game. For example, when a special winning opening open designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect processing (S79).

  Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the hold effect process (S72) in the effect control process. In the hold effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display notice effect determination process for determining whether to execute the hold display notice effect (S901). Next, the start winning presentation process (S902) for moving the hold display generated by the start winning to the hold storage area 5D or the active display area 5F, the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D, Hold display to be displayed at a new display position based on the start of a new variable display · Active display transition effect for executing transition effect production · Active display transition effect process (S904), display of pending display or active display Hold display / active display update process (S 905) for updating the mode based on the display mode flag, and the hold display mode corresponding LED lighting process (with the hold display mode corresponding LED 30 lit in a color corresponding to the display mode or the active display) S 906), the LED of the display 31 corresponding to the number of held display is displayed in the held storage display area 5D Turned on and off is to hold display number corresponding indicator lighting process () S907 is executed in accordance with the hold display number it is, ends the hold effect process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing pending display advance presentation effect determination processing (S901) in the pending presentation processing. In the hold display advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 194A (S240), and the display undecided flag indicates whether or not there is a new storage of a start winning time command. It is judged whether or not there is an entry in which “1” is set to (S241).

  If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1" (S241; N), the pending display advance notice effect determination process is ended, and there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is set to "1" In the case (S241; Y), whether there is an entry in which the change destination flag is already set to "1" or "2", that is, there is a pending storage for which the execution of the pending display preview effect has already been determined. It is determined whether or not (S242). If there is an entry in which the change destination flag is set to “1” or “2” (S 242; Y), the process proceeds to S 256 and there is no entry in which the change destination flag is set to “1” or “2”. In the case (S242; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designating command of the entry is the first symbol designating command, that is, whether the symbol designating command is a command indicating detachment (S243). If the symbol designating command of the entry is not the first symbol designating command, that is, if it is a command indicating a big hit (any of the big hit A, the big hit B, the non big hit) (S243; N), the entry The jackpot type is identified from the symbol designation command (S244).

  Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for holding display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 and the big hit classification not shown based on the jackpot type specified in S244, for example By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the on-hold display preview effect is to be executed, and the display pattern when the on-hold display preview effect is to be performed (S245).

  In S245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 25 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 25 (A), the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) is varied according to the jackpot type specified in the process of S244.

  Specifically, two types of display pattern β and display pattern γ are provided as display patterns (prediction types) of the pending display advance presentation effect. Among them, when the display pattern of the hold display advance effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the hold memory display area 5D with a white square (◇), and the display pattern of the hold display advance effect ( When the notice type is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending storage display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5D in a white star shape (*). In the present embodiment, when non-execution of the on-hold display preview effect is determined, the on-hold storage display is displayed in the on-hold storage display area 5D in the display pattern α that is a white circle (o).

  In addition, when the variation display result is a big hit, there is no case where the hold display notice effect is not determined to be non-execution and the execution of the hold display notice effect is always determined and the display pattern β or display is displayed as a display pattern (notice type) One of the display patterns (notice type) of the pattern γ is determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), when the jackpot type is “probably big hit A”, the display pattern β is determined as the ratio at which the display pattern γ is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probably big hit B" or "non-probable big hit", the rate at which the display pattern γ is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined It is set low.

  When the variation display result is "big hit" and display of display pattern γ is executed as a display pattern (prediction type) by such setting, the type of big hit than when display of display pattern β is performed The probability that A is a probability variation big hit A is high, and the expectation for the player to be a probability variation big hit A can be raised.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation display result is "big hit", the display pattern β or white for displaying the suspension storage display on a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the suspension display advance presentation effect Although one of the display patterns of the display pattern γ displayed in a star shape (*) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this and the variation display result is “big hit”. Also, as in the case where the variable display result is “off”, a case may be provided in which non-execution of the on-hold display notice effect is determined.

  In addition, in S243, if the symbol designation command of the entry for which the display undecided flag is set to "1" is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating detachment (S243; Y), a new A variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the stored entry is identified (S247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as a category of variation pattern of "non-reach", and if it is C601H, it is a category of variation pattern of "super reach". In the case of C602H, it may be specified as a category of "other" variation patterns including normal reach.

  Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the suspension display notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and based on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in S247, By referring to the hour hold display notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is to be performed, and a display pattern (notice type) when the hold display notice effect is to be performed (S248).

  In S248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 25 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 25 (B), depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the process of S247, the presence or absence of execution of the pending display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are made different. There is.

  Specifically, two types of display patterns β and display patterns γ are provided as display patterns (preliminary notice types). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending storage display is displayed in the on-hold storage display area 5D as a white square (◇) and the display pattern (notice type) is displayed pattern When it is determined to be γ, the pending storage display is displayed in the pending storage display area 5D in a white star shape (*). When the on-hold display notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the on-hold storage display is displayed in the on-hold storage display area 5D in a circle (o).

  As shown in FIG. 25 (B), when the variation display result is "off" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variation display result is "off" and the category of the variation pattern is " The ratio at which the hold display advance notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “no notice effect”) is set higher than in the case of “non-reach”. Also, when the variation display result is “off” and the category of the variation pattern is “super reach”, the variation display result is “off” and the category of the variation pattern is “other” than The rate at which the on-hold display advance notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than “no notice effect”) is set high.

  When the execution of the pending display advance notice effect is determined when the variable display result is “off”, the case where the category of the change pattern is “non-reach” when the change category is “other” The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is also set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is “super reach”, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is “other”. Furthermore, when the execution of the pending display advance notice effect is determined when the variable display result is “off”, the category of the change pattern is “non-reach” when the category of the change pattern is “other”. In the case where the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case where the category of the variation pattern is “super reach”, the display pattern is more than the case where the category of the variation pattern is “other”. The rate at which β is determined is set high.

  In addition, in the case where the variation display result is "off", the percentage at which the pending display notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to be the highest, the pending display notice effect is determined to be performed, and the rate at which the display pattern γ is determined is set to be the lowest.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), when the variable display result is “big hit”, the pending display advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pending display advance effect Is determined to be executed and the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the display pattern β or the display pattern γ in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the fluctuation display result is “off” is determined It is set higher than the ratio.

  Furthermore, in the case where the execution of the pending display advance presentation effect is determined in the case where the variation display result is “off (non reach)”, “off (super reach)”, or “off (other)”, the display pattern β The rate at which is determined is set to be higher than the rate at which the display pattern γ is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probable variation A)", when the execution of the hold display advance presentation effect is determined, the ratio in which the display pattern γ is determined is the ratio in which the display pattern β is determined It is set higher than that.

  When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (prediction type) of the pending display advance presentation effect by such setting, the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is not executed (displayed) The fluctuation display result is more likely to be "big hit" than when the display pattern γ is executed (displayed), the fluctuation display result is "big hit", and the big hit type is "probably big hit A" The rate of becoming is increased, so that the player's expectation can be raised.

  After the execution of S248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the on-hold display notice effect is determined in S248, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. It is determined (S249). If the execution of the on-hold display notice effect is determined (S249; Y), the process proceeds to S250, and if the on-hold display notice effect is not determined to be performed (S249; N), the process proceeds to S256.

  In S256, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” indicating white “o” in the hold display flag of the entry, and then proceeds to S257.

  After execution of S245, or when execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in S249, for example, a numerical value indicating a random number value for shift number determination extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc. By referring to the shift number determination table (not shown) based on the data, the symbol designation command of the entry and the number of pending storages (total number of pending storages), until the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes The number of shifts is determined (S250).

  Specifically, when the symbol designation command indicates a big hit, the number of shifts until the display mode of the pending display or the active display changes is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. When the designated command indicates a release, the number of shifts until the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 26 (B).

  As shown in FIGS. 26 (A) and 26 (B), in this embodiment, the number of pending storages (total number of pending storages) is different between the case where the symbol designation command indicates a big hit and the case where it is not. Accordingly, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the hold display advance notice effect, is determined to any one of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7 at different rates. In the example shown in FIG. 26, that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 indicates that the hold display is displayed in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at the timing of the start winning.

  In this embodiment, when the symbol designating command indicates a big hit, it is a ratio that determines the number of shifts of the pending display or the active display which is the target of the pending display notice effect more than when the symbol designating command indicates disengaging Is set high, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the timing when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, and the game interest can be improved, but the present invention is limited to this If the symbol designating command indicates a big hit, the ratio of determining the number of shifts of the pending display or the active display, which is the target of the pending display notification effect, is smaller than when the symbol designating command indicates a release. It may be set high, and when the symbol designating command indicates a big hit and the symbol designating command indicates disengaging, pending Shown may not be provided a difference in determining the proportion of a hold display and shift number of the active display is announcement attraction of interest.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the shift number counter to the value determined in S250 (S251), and determines whether the value set to the shift number counter is “0” (S252). When the value set in the shift number counter is "0" (S252; Y), a value (1 or 2) corresponding to the display pattern determined in S245 or S248 for the display mode flag and the change destination flag of the entry Is set, and the process proceeds to S257 (S253). If the value set in the shift number counter is "1" or more (S252; N), "0" is set in the display mode flag of the entry (S254) ), The value (1 or 2) corresponding to the display pattern determined in S245 or S248 is set in the change destination flag of the entry, and the process proceeds to S257 (S255).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets “0” to the display undecided flag of the entry in S 257. Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (S261). In addition, it is determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the effect symbol process or not, and the value of the effect control process flag is the effect pattern whether the super reach effect is being executed or not. If it is a value corresponding to the process during fluctuation, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by further referring to process data being executed.

  If the super reach effect is being executed (S261; Y), the pending display advance effect determining process is ended. If the super reach effect is not being executed (S261; N), the number of pending storages (total pending storage) It is determined whether the number is 1 or not (S262). If the number of pending storages is 2 or more, that is, if the pending storage is a pending storage occurring in a state in which one or more other pending storages already exist (S262; N), the process proceeds to S263 and the number of pending storages is 1 In the case (S262; Y), the process proceeds to S271.

  In S263, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the display mode flag of the entry is “0”. When the display mode flag of the entry is "0" (S263; Y), the move destination position in the hold storage display area 5D of the hold display which is the display pattern α (that is, the display pattern of the hold display advance effect non-execution). Is determined based on the number of pending storages, and the determined destination position is stored (S 264). Then, the process proceeds to S269.

  If the display mode flag of the entry is not "0" (S263; N), it is determined whether the display mode flag of the entry is "1" (S265). When the display mode flag of the entry is “1” (S 265; Y), the move destination position in the hold storage display area 5 D of the hold display which is the display pattern β is determined based on the number of hold memories The destination position is stored (S266). Then, the process proceeds to S269. Furthermore, when the display mode flag of the entry is not “1” (S 265; N), the display mode flag of the entry is “2”, and movement of the hold display of the hold display which is the display pattern γ in the hold storage display area 5 D The destination position is determined based on the number of pending storages, and the determined destination position is stored (S268). Then, the process proceeds to S269.

  In the present embodiment, the pending storage display area 5D displays the pending display corresponding to the buffer number 1 of the start winning reception command buffer 194A when the total pending storage number is 1 and the variable display is being executed. For the hold 1 display position, the hold 2 display position for displaying the hold display corresponding to the buffer number 2 of the start winning prize reception command buffer 194A when the total hold memory number is 2, the total hold memory number is 3 Hold 3 display position for displaying the hold display corresponding to buffer number 3 of the start winning reception command buffer 194A when there is a buffer number 4 of the start winning reception command buffer 194A when the total number of holding memories is 4 Hold 4 display position for displaying the hold display corresponding to, when the total number of pending storage is 5, start winning winning reception command buffer In order to display the hold indication corresponding to buffer number 6 of the start-up winning reception command buffer 194A when the hold 5 display position for displaying the hold indication corresponding to the buffer number 5 of 194A and the total number of pending storages is six. 6 display position of the hold, 7 hold display position for displaying the hold display corresponding to the buffer number 7 of the start winning prize reception command buffer 194A when the total hold storage number is 7, the total hold storage number is 8 A hold 8 display position for displaying a hold display corresponding to the buffer number 8 of the start winning reception command buffer 194A is juxtaposed downward or upward in a straight line.

  That is, among the hold 1 display position to the hold 8 display position, the hold 1 display position is provided farthest from the character image C, and the hold 8 display position is provided closest to the character image C. (Distance from character image C: Hold 1 display position> Hold 2 display position> Hold 3 display position> Hold 4 display position> Hold 5 display position> Hold 6 display position> Hold 7 display position> Hold 8 display position). In S264, S266, and S268, the destination position of the hold display is determined to one of the hold 1 display position to the hold 8 display position based on the number of hold memories.

  Next, in S269, the CPU for effect control 120 stores the number of pending storages (total number of pending storages) as the number of start-up winning presentation start pending storages. Also, a flag indicating that the first start winning effect is being executed, which indicates that the first start winning effect is being moved to move the hold display at the same speed toward the destination position determined in any of S264, S266, S268. Is set, and the on-hold display advance notice effect determination process is ended (S270).

  In addition, in S271, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value according to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process. If the value of the effect control process flag is not a value according to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process, that is, if the fluctuation display is being performed or the big hit game is being performed, the processing of S263 to S270 is executed. On the other hand, when the value of the effect control process flag is a value according to the fluctuation pattern designation command reception waiting process, that is, the number of other pending storages is 0 and the variable display is not being executed or the big hit game is not being executed. In the case of the pending storage generated in the state, the second start winning effect for moving to the active display area 5F with the pending display as the active display at the same speed as the first start winning effect is being executed. The flag indicating that the second start winning effect is being executed is set, and the on-hold display notice effect determining process is ended (S272).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing start winning effect processing (S902) in the hold effect processing. In the start winning effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the second start winning effect in-progress flag is set (S281). If the second start prize effect executing flag is set (S281; Y), the second start prize effect execution process (S287) is executed to end the start prize effect process, and the second start prize effect is being executed. If the flag is not set (S281; N), it is determined whether the first starting winning effect under execution flag is set (S282).

  When the flag for the first start winning effect is not set (S282; N), the start winning effect process is ended, and when the flag for the first start winning effect is set (S282; Y), The number of start winning effect start storages is compared with the current number of held storages (S 283), and it is determined whether the current number of held storages is reduced from the number of start storages at start start storages (S 284). When the current number of pending storages is reduced from the starting pending effect start pending storage number (S284; Y), the destination position of the pending display in the pending storage display area 5D is suspended 1 based on the current pending storage number 1 From the display position to the hold 7 display position is determined again and stored, and the process proceeds to S286 (S285). If the current number of pending storages has not decreased from the number of starting pending effect starting storages, the process proceeds to S286 without executing the process of S285.

  Then, at S286, the CPU for effect control 120 executes the first start winning effect execution process and ends the start effect process.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a first start winning effect execution process in the start winning effect process. In the first start winning effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a process timer for first start winning effect described later is in operation (S401). If the first start winning presentation process timer is not in operation (S401; N), the display mode of the new hold display, that is, the display mode flag stored in the lowest entry of the start winning reception command buffer A process table for the first start winning presentation according to the value is selected (S402). Then, the first start winning effect process timer is started in the first start winning effect process data 1 of the selected first start winning effect process table (S403). That is, in the first start winning effect of the present embodiment, when the execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined based on the start winning and the number of times of shift is determined 0 times as shown in FIG. The pending display displayed in β or display pattern γ is moved toward the pending storage display area 5D.

  In the first start winning effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data and the like for controlling the sound are arranged in order in time series in correspondence with each first start winning effect process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first start winning effect (effect component) according to the contents of the first start winning effect process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). Control of the effect display device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts) is executed, and the first start winning effect execution process is ended (S404). For example, in order to display the image of the hold display on the effect display device 5, an instruction is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, in order to control lighting and extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. The process table for the first start winning effect in the present embodiment is an image (animation for moving the hold display from the character image C toward the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D as a first start winning effect. It is a process table for displaying).

  If the first start winning effect process timer is in operation (S401; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the first start winning effect process timer by 1 (S405), and the first start winning method is performed. It is determined whether the effect process timer has timed out (S406). When the first start winning effect process timer has not timed out (S406; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first start winning effect process data corresponding to the first start winning effect process data. 1 Start winning effect (control of effect display device 5 as a part for effect, various LEDs as part for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as part for effect) is executed (S407). And the pending display is the destination position in the pending storage display area 5D (any one of S264, S266, S268 of the pending display notice effect determining process or the pending 1 display position re-decided in S285 of the start winning effect process) It is determined whether one of the seven display positions has been reached (S408).

  If the hold display does not reach the move destination position in the hold storage display area 5D (S408; N), the first start winning presentation execution process is ended, and the hold display reaches the move destination position in the hold storage display area 5D If not (S408; Y), the process proceeds to S412.

  When the first start winning effect process timer has timed out (S406; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the last first start winning effect process timer has expired, that is, the hold display It is determined whether the position (pending 1 display position) corresponding to the pending storage number 1 in the pending storage display area 5D has been reached (S409). If the last first start winning effect process timer has not timed out (S409; N), the first start winning effect process data is switched (S410), and the next first start winning effect timer is selected. Start (S410a) And, according to the contents of the process data for the first start winning effect corresponding to the process timer for the next first start winning effect 1st start winning effect (effect display device 5 as effect parts, effect parts Control of the various LEDs as LEDs and the speakers 8L and 8R as rendering components (S411). Then, the process proceeds to step S408.

  Furthermore, when the last first start winning effect process timer has timed out (S409; Y), the process proceeds to S412. In S412, CPU 120 for production control clears the flag under the 1st starting winning a prize execution under, ends 1st starting winning a prize execution processing.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B), the first start winning effect in the present embodiment is caused by the start winning being generated while the variable display is being performed, and the storage display from the character image C is displayed. It is an effect that displays a common animation for moving the hold display toward the hold 1 display position in the area 5D, and the hold display is made at a predetermined position (one of the hold 1 display position to the hold 8 display position) The animation in which the hold indication moves based on the arrival is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, only one data (the process data for the first start winning effect) for executing the display of the common animation is stored as the execution data of the first start winning effect. Since it is not necessary to store the execution data of the first start winning presentation according to the number of pending storages, it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

  Furthermore, in the first start winning effect of the present embodiment, as shown in S284 and FIG. 285 of FIG. 27, even if the number of pending storage decreases due to the start of a new change display etc., the pending display moves Since the tip position can be changed, the hold display can be moved to an appropriate position based on the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5D and displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort and producing effects of the first start winning effect Can be prevented.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which a common animation is displayed regardless of the number of reserved memories as the first start winning effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first start is not limited to this. As the winning effect, different animations may be displayed depending on the number of pending storages.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a second start winning effect execution process in the start winning effect process. In the second start winning effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a process timer for second start winning effect described later is in operation (S421). When the process timer for the second start winning effect is not in operation (S421; N), the display mode of the new active display, that is, the display stored in the entry of the buffer number “1” of the start winning reception command buffer A process table for the second start winning effect according to the value of the mode flag is selected (S422). Then, the second start winning effect process timer is started in the second start winning effect process data 1 of the selected second start winning effect process table (S 423). That is, in the second start winning effect of the present embodiment, when execution of the on-hold display advance notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the active display displayed in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is the active display area Move toward 5F.

  In the second start winning effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data and the like for controlling the sound are arranged in order in time series in association with each second start winning effect process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs second start winning effect (effect component) according to the contents of the second start winning effect process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1). Control of the effect display device 5, various LEDs as effect parts, and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts) is executed, and the second start winning effect execution process is ended (S424). For example, in order to display the image of the hold display on the effect display device 5, an instruction is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, in order to control lighting and extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. The process table for the second start winning effect in this embodiment is for moving the hold display from the character image C through the hold storage display area 5D toward the active display area 5F as a second start winning effect. It is a process table for displaying an image (animation).

  When the second start winning effect process timer is in operation (S421; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the second start winning effect process timer by 1 (S425), and the second start winning method is performed. It is determined whether the effect process timer has timed out (S426). If the process timer for the second start winning effect has not timed out (S426; N), the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process according to the content of the process data for second start winning effect corresponding to the process timer for second start winning effect. (2) Control of the start-up winning effect (control of the effect display device 5 as part for effect, various LEDs as part for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as part for effect), and the second start-up effect execution process is ended ( S427).

  Also, when the second start winning effect process timer has timed out (S426; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the last second start winning effect process timer has expired, that is, the hold display It is determined whether the active display area 5F has been reached (S428). If the last second start winning effect process timer has not timed out (S428; N), the second start winning effect process data is switched (S429), and the next second start winning effect process timer Start (S429a). Then, according to the contents of the process data for the second start winning effect corresponding to the process timer for the second start winning effect for the second start winning effect (effect display device 5 as a component for effect, various LEDs as components for effect and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R as a part for effect is executed, and the second start winning effect execution process is ended (S430).

  Furthermore, when the last second start winning effect process timer has timed out (S428; Y), the effect control CPU 120 clears the second start winning effect executing flag, and ends the second start winning effect execution process. To do (S431).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 30 (C) and FIG. 30 (D), in the second start winning effect in the present embodiment, there is no pending storage, and the start winning occurs during non-execution of the variable display. Is an effect of displaying an animation for moving the hold display from the character image C to (pass through) the hold storage display area 5D toward the active display area 5F, and the hold display has reached the active display area 5F. The animation that the hold display moves based on the event is ended.

  The second start winning effect is, as described above, an effect of moving the hold display from the character image C to (passing through) the hold storage display area 5D toward the active display area 5F. And the distance from the character image C to the hold 1 display position is set longer (the distance from the character image C: active display area> hold 1 display position> hold 2 display position) > Hold 3 display position> Hold 4 display position> Hold 5 display position> Hold 6 display position> Hold 7 display position> Hold 8 display position) Production time of the second start winning effect is longer than the first start winning effect It is set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, as a first start winning effect, the effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D from T1, the character image C The effect time for moving the hold display to the hold 2 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T2, the effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 3 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T3, The effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 4 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T4, the effect for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 5 display position of the hold storage display area 5D Time T5, effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 6 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T6 The effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 7 display position of the hold storage display area 5D T7, the effect for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 8 display position of the hold storage display area 5D Assuming that the time is T8, and the effect time for moving the hold display from the character image C to the active display area 5F via the hold storage display area 5D as a second start winning effect is T0, T0 is the longest, and then The rendering time becomes shorter in the order of T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8 (rendering time: T0> T1> T2> T3> T3> T4> T5> T6> T7> T8).

  FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing on-hold display / active display transition effect execution processing in on-hold effect processing. In the hold display / active display transition effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the hold display / active display transition effect executing flag indicating that the hold display / active display transition effect is being executed is set or not It is determined (S291). If the pending display / active display transition effect executing flag is not set (S291; Y), whether or not the change start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the change start command is received (S292). If the change start command reception flag is not set (S292; N), the pending display / active display transition effect processing ends, and if the pending display / active display transition effect executing flag is set (S292; Y) ) Selects the process table for the on-hold display / active display transition effect according to the combination of the on-hold storage number (total on-hold storage number) and the display mode of the on-hold display being displayed (S293). Then, the pending display / active display transition effect process timer for the selected pending display / active display transition effect process table is displayed (S294).

  In addition, display control execution data for controlling the display of effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and speakers 8L and 8R in the process table for suspension display / active display transition effect Sound control execution data and the like for controlling the sound to be output are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with the process data n (from 1 to N) for the on-hold display / active display transition effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the hold display / active display transition effect (effect) according to the contents (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) of the process for suspension display / active display transition effect 1 Control of the effect display device 5 as a component, various LEDs as a component for effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R as a component for effect is executed (S295). For example, each pending display in the effect display device 5 is displayed on the upper one display position in the pending storage display area 5D (one of the pending 1 display location to the pending 7 display position) or the active display area 5F based on the start of variable display. A command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to move it. In addition, in order to control lighting and extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13.

  After the execution of S295, the effect control CPU 120 sets the pending display / active display transition effect execution flag and ends the pending display / active display transition effect processing (S296).

  If the on-hold display / active display transition effect executing flag is set (S291; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the on-hold display / active display transition effect process timer by 1 (S297), It is determined whether the process timer for pending display / active display transition effect has timed out (S298). If the process timer for hold display / active display transition effect has not timed out (S 298; N), the CPU 120 for effect control is for hold display / active display transition effect corresponding to the process timer for hold display / active display transition Hold display · Execute active display transition effect (control of the effect display device 5 as a part for effect, various LEDs as parts for effect, and speakers 8L and 8R as parts for effect) according to the contents of the process data and hold display · The active display transition effect processing ends (S299).

  Also, when the process timer for pending display / active display transition effect has timed out (S 426; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether the last pending display / active display operation effect process timer has timed out (S 426) S300). If the last hold display / active display transition effect process timer has not expired (S300; N), the hold display / active display transition effect process data switch is performed (S301), the next hold display / active A display transition effect process timer is started (S301a). Then, according to the contents of the process of pending display / active display transition effect corresponding to the next pending display / active display transition effect process timer, pending display / active display transition effect (effect display device 5 as a component for effect, for effect The control of the various LEDs as parts and the speakers 8L and 8R as parts for effect is executed, and the suspension display / active display transition effect processing ends (S302).

  If the last hold display / active display transition effect process timer has expired (S300; Y), the hold display / active display transition effect executing flag is cleared and the hold display / active display transition effect process is ended. (S303).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the hold display / active display transition effect from the timing of starting the variable display, the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D is newly displayed or displayed. It is possible to move toward the area 5F.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the hold display / active display update process in the hold effect process. In the on-hold display / active display update process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (S501). In addition, it is determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the process during the effect symbol process or not, and the value of the effect control process flag is the effect pattern whether the super reach effect is being executed or not. If it is a value corresponding to the process during fluctuation, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by further referring to process data being executed.

  If the super reach effect is being executed (S501; Y), the process proceeds to S506. If the super reach effect is not being executed (S501; N), the pending display / active display transition effect executing flag is set. It is determined whether or not (S502). If the pending display / active display transition effect executing flag is set (S502; Y), the pending display / active display update processing is ended, and the pending display / active display transition effect executing flag is not set. (S502; N), it is determined whether or not the second starting winning effect under execution flag is set (S503).

  If the second start winning effect under execution flag is set (S503; Y), the pending display / active display update process is ended, and if the second start winning effect under execution flag is not set (S503; N) ) Updates and displays the active display in the display mode (display pattern) specified from the display mode flag stored in the active display storage buffer 194B (S504). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first start winning effect under execution flag is set (S505). If the first start winning effect executing flag is set (S505; Y), the pending display / active display updating process is ended, and if the first start winning effect executing flag is not set (S505; N) ) Goes to S506.

  Further, at S506, the CPU for effect control 120 updates and displays each hold display in the display mode (display pattern) specified from the display mode flag stored in the start winning winning reception command buffer 194A, and the hold display / active display End the update process.

  As described above, by executing the hold display / active display update process of the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display does not change during execution of the first start winning effect or the second start win effect. ing. Also, while the super reach effect is being executed, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D is not updated (it does not change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ), so the variation during the execution of the player It is possible to focus attention on the display or the active display corresponding to the variable display.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the on-hold display mode corresponding LED lighting process in the on-hold effect process. In the hold display mode corresponding LED lighting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an entry whose display mode flag is “1” in the start-up winning reception command buffer 194A, that is, displays in the hold storage display area 5D. It is determined whether there is a hold display displayed in the pattern β (S311). When there is an entry whose display mode flag is “1” in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (S311; Y), the blue display mode corresponding LED 30 corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display pattern β is displayed. The lighting is started at step S32, and the pending display mode corresponding LED lighting process is ended (S312). In addition, when there is no entry whose display mode flag is "1" in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (S311; N), there is an entry whose display mode flag is "2" in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. It is determined whether or not there is a hold display displayed in the hold pattern 5 in the hold storage display area 5D (S313). When there is an entry whose display mode flag is “2” in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (S313; Y), the red display mode corresponding LED 30 corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display pattern γ The lighting is started at step S, and the pending display mode corresponding LED lighting process is ended (S 314).

  Further, when there is no entry whose display mode flag is "2" (S313; N), the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the pending display mode corresponding LED 30 is lit in blue or red (S315) . When the pending display mode corresponding LED 30 is lit in blue or red (S315; Y), the pending display mode supported LED 30 is turned off and the pending display mode supported LED lighting process is ended (S316), and the pending display mode supported When the LED 30 is not lit in blue and red (S315; N), the process of turning on the pending display mode corresponding LED is ended without executing S316.

  In the hold display corresponding LED lighting process of this embodiment, the hold display corresponding to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ is moved to the active display area 5F so that the hold display aspect corresponding LED 30 is extinguished. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pending display corresponding LED lighting process, pending until the variable display corresponding to the pending display (active display) moved to the active display area 5F is ended The lighting of the display mode corresponding LED 30 (the lighting in blue corresponding to the display pattern β or in red corresponding to the display pattern γ) may be continued.

  In addition, in the hold display number corresponding display lighting process (S 907) in the hold effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the LED in the hold display number correspondence display 31 based on the hold memory number (total hold memory number) It is sufficient to control the light off. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B), when the number of pending storages increases due to the occurrence of a new start winning, the LED that the pending display number correspondence indicator 31 has is used. If the number of pending storages is decreased by additionally lighting and a new variable display is started, one LED of the pending display number corresponding display 31 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 30C and 30D, if there is no hold storage and the start winning occurs while the variable display is not being executed, the start winning will be made once. Since the pending storage based on the start-up winning reception command buffer 194A is transferred to the active display storage buffer 194B (see FIG. 34), the LED in the pending display number corresponding indicator 31 lights up for only one moment, but The invention is not limited to this, and when the start winning combination occurs while there is no pending storage and the variable display is not being executed, the LED in the pending display number correspondence indicator 31 may not be turned on. .

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a change start command reception flag is set (S321). If the variation start command reception flag is not set (S 321; N), the effect symbol variation start processing is ended, and if the variation start command reception flag is set (S 321; Y), the start winning prize reception command The pending storage of buffer number "1" in the buffer 194A is transferred to the active display storage buffer 194B (S322). Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the pending storage of the buffer numbers “2” to “8” in the start-up winning reception command buffer 194A upward by the buffer number (S323).

  Specifically, the hold storage stored in association with the buffer number “2” of the start winning reception command buffer 194A is shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1”, and the start winning reception command The pending storage stored in association with buffer number "3" in buffer 194A is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2", and corresponds to buffer number "4" in start winning reception command buffer 194A. Shift the stored storage that has been stored so as to be associated with buffer number “3”, and store the stored storage that has been stored so as to be associated with buffer number “5” of start-up winning reception command buffer 194A Shifts so as to be stored in association with the number “4”, and corresponds to the buffer number “6” of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. Shift the stored storage that has been stored so as to be stored in association with buffer number “5”, and buffer the stored storage that has been stored in association with buffer number “7” of the start winning reception command buffer 194A Shifts so as to be stored in association with the number “6”, stores the pending storage stored in association with the buffer number “8” of the start winning reception command buffer 194A in association with the buffer number “7” To shift.

  After the execution of S323, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (S324).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the rendering symbol is determined according to the data stored in the variable display result specification command storage area (that is, the received variable display result specification command) (S325). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the change display result designated by the change display result designation command, and the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol is stored in the effect symbol display result storage area Store in

  In the present embodiment, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the CPU 120 for effect control, for example, has three symbols “7” as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit design) of the production design that was aligned with. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as a stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", It is determined from "combinations of rendering symbols such as" 333 "," 555 ", and" 999 ". In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120, for example, as a stop design, the 3 design symbols of even production Determine the combination (big hit design). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is a first variable display result specification command corresponding to a release, a combination (deletion design) of a production design in which 3 symbols become irregular as a stop design is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of the effect symbols are associated with numerical values. It is sufficient to decide the stop symbol of the effect symbol. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the action effect determination process (S326) shown in FIG. 35 to determine whether or not to execute the action effect acting on the hold display or the active display in the variable display, and the effect pattern of the action effect Decide.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the effect determination process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether any value of 1 to 7 is set in the shift number counter, that is, the hold display notice effect It is determined whether or not there is a pending display that is the target of, but the display mode has not changed from the display pattern α (S341). If one of the values 1 to 7 is not set in the shift number counter (S341; N), the process proceeds to S344, and if any value of 1 to 7 is set in the shift number counter (S341; Y) decrements the value of the shift number counter by 1 (S342). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the shift number counter has become 0, that is, the display mode of the pending display or the active display for which the starting variable display is the target of the on-hold display notice effect It is determined whether it is a variable display (S343). When the value of the shift number counter is not 0 (S343; N), the process proceeds to S344, and when the value of the shift number counter is 0 (S345), the process proceeds to S345.

  In S344, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the action effect, and the effect pattern, based on the fact that the variable display to be started is the non-target change of the display mode change of the hold display or the active display. In S344, the CPU for effect control 120, for example, the operation for non-target variation not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random value for action effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. By referring to the effect execution determination table, the effect pattern may be determined based on the determination ratio shown in FIG. 36 (A).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36A, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the action effect at a rate of 85% and executes the action effect with the effect pattern A at a rate of 14%. To determine that the effect pattern is to be executed in the effect pattern B at a rate of 1%.

  On the other hand, in S345, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the action effect and the effect pattern, based on the fact that the variable display to be started is the target change of the display mode change of the hold display or the active display. Note that, at S345, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, a not-shown action for changing the object based on numerical data indicating a random value for action effect determination extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. By referring to the effect execution determination table, the determination shown in FIG. 36 (B) according to the change destination display mode (value set in the change destination flag) of the hold display or the active display that is the target of the hold display preview effect. What is necessary is just to determine the execution and non-execution of the effect presentation and the effect pattern in proportion.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the change display mode of the hold display or the active display that is the target of the hold display advance effect is the display pattern β (change destination flag) (When “1” is set to 0), determines non-execution of the effect presentation at a rate of 0%, and determines to execute the effect presentation at the presentation pattern A at a rate of 70%, 30% It is decided to execute the action effect in the effect pattern B in proportion. In addition, when the change display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the hold display advance notice effect, is the display pattern γ (when the change destination flag is set to “2”), the operation is performed at a rate of 0%. Non-execution of the effect is determined, it is determined that the effect effect is performed in the effect pattern A at a rate of 20%, and it is determined that the effect effect is performed in the effect pattern B at a rate of 80%.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the action effect is executed in the effect pattern B, the on-hold display being a target of the on-hold display notice effect at a higher rate than when the effect effect is performed in the effect pattern A Alternatively, the display mode of the active display is changed. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the hold display advance notice effect, changes, the action effect is performed in the effect pattern B, and the action effect is performed in the effect pattern A. The display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the hold display preview effect, is changed to the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the case. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the action effect is executed, it is possible to make the game pay attention to which of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B is to be executed and the game enjoyment can be improved. It is possible.

  In addition, the effect pattern A in the action effect of the present embodiment is an effect pattern in which the character makes an attack on the hold display or the active display, and in the effect pattern B, a character different from the effect pattern B attacks the hold display or the active display. It is an effect pattern that adds As described above, in the effect presentation of this embodiment, since the characters that attack the hold display or the active display are different according to the effect pattern, the player recognizes the characters that attack the hold display or the active display. Thus, it is possible to specify the effect pattern of the action effect.

  After the execution of S344 or S345, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the action effect has been determined in S344 or S345 (S346). When execution of the effect presentation is determined in S344 or S345 (S346; Y), the effect control CPU 120 sets an operation presentation execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the operation presentation has been determined (S347), and S344 or S344 or The effect pattern determined in S345 is stored, and the operation effect determination process is ended (S348). When the execution of the effect presentation is not determined in S344 or S345 (S346; N), the operation presentation determination process is ended without executing S347 and S348.

  After the effect presentation ends, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 34, and determines whether the effect presentation execution determination flag is set (S327). When the effect presentation execution determination flag is set (S 327; Y), a value according to the period until the operation presentation start is set in the operation presentation start waiting timer (S 328), and the operation presentation execution determination flag is cleared. Then, the process proceeds to S330 (S329). When the effect presentation execution determination flag is not set (S327; N), the process proceeds to S330 without executing S328 and S329.

  In S330, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S331).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data and the like are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 follows the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) as a effect device (effect display device 5 as effect components, effect components) The control of the various LEDs and the speakers 8L and 8R as presentation parts is executed (S332). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 5, an instruction is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, in order to control turning on / off various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU for effect control 120 controls so that the fluctuation display of the effect pattern by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command is performed, but the CPU for effect control 120 designates the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S333). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S334). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left middle right effect pattern to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the information to the VRAM. By outputting a signal corresponding to the image data to the effect display device 5 and the effect display device 5 displaying an image according to the signal, the variation of the effect pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol process (S75), and the effect pattern change start process is ended (S335).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a process (S75) during effect symbol variation in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by one (S351, S352, S353). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 has an action effect start waiting timer set (determined to perform action effect), or an action effect in-progress flag is set (action effect is in progress) If it is (S354; Y), the effect presentation process shown in FIG. 38 is executed (S355). If neither the effect presentation start waiting timer nor the effect presentation in progress flag is set, the process proceeds to S356 without performing the effect presentation process of S355.

  In S356, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S357). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (S 358). Further, the control state of the rendering device (the component for effect) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data and the like set next to the display control execution data (S359). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, control of the rendering device (component for presentation) is performed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, etc.) corresponding to the process timer. Execute (S360).

  Next, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation control timer has timed out (S361). If the fluctuation control timer has timed out (S 361; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left middle right display pattern (displayed 30 ms after the display switching time of the previous display pattern) Image data of the screen to be created is written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (S362). As such, in the effect display device 5, variation control of the effect pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 causes the effect display device 5 to use a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a background image set and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. As such, in the effect display device 5, the background image, the character image and the effect pattern in the fluctuation of the effect pattern are displayed. Further, a predetermined value is reset to the fluctuation control timer (S363).

  When the fluctuation control timer has not timed out (S361; N), or after execution of S363, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start timing of the super reach effect (S364). If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the character image C displayed in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 is hidden (S365). After execution of S365, or when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the super reach effect (S364; N), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the super reach effect (S366). If it is the end timing of the super reach effect (S 366; Y), the display of the character image C in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 is resumed (S 367).

  After execution of S367, or when it is not the end timing of super reach production (S366; N), CPU120 for production control checks whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (S368). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76) (S370). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination designation command has been received is set (S 369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the effect symbol variation stop processing ( It updates to the value according to S76) (S370). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the control shifts to control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received. For example, the fluctuation pattern designation command showing a long fluctuation time due to noise etc. between boards Even when it is received, it is possible to end the fluctuation of the effect pattern when the normal fluctuation time elapses (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  In the process table used for the variation control of the production symbol, the process data during the variation display of the production symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of S361, there is no process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the effect design based on the process table ends Do.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an operation effect process (S355) in the process of effect symbol variation. In the effect presentation process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether an action presentation in progress flag indicating that action presentation is in progress is set (S371). If the effect presentation in-progress flag is not set (S371; N), the value of the action presentation start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (S372), and whether or not the action presentation start waiting timer has timed out (action presentation start It is determined whether the value of the waiting timer has become 0) (S373). If the effect presentation start waiting timer has not timed out (S373; N), the operation effect processing ends, and if the effect presentation start waiting timer has timed out (S373; Y), the action effect executing flag is set (S374).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value according to the action effect period to the action effect period timer (S375), and selects an action effect process table according to the effect pattern of the action effect (S376). Then, the operation effect process timer is started in the operation effect process data 1 of the selected operation effect process table (S377).

  In addition, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled in the process table for operation effect Sound control execution data and the like to be used are arranged in order in time series in association with the process data n (from 1 to N) for effect presentation.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs action effect (effect display device 5 as effect component, effect according to the contents of the process data for action effect 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1) Control of the various LEDs as the components and the speakers 8L and 8R as the components for presentation is executed, and the operation presentation process is ended (S378). For example, in order to cause the character corresponding to the effect pattern of the action effect in the effect display device 5 to act on the hold display or the active display (add an attack), a command is output to the display control unit 123. In addition, in order to control lighting and extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. In addition, in order to perform audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13.

  If it is determined in S371 that the action effect executing flag is set (S371; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the values of the action effect process timer and the action effect period timer by 1 (S379, S380 ), It is determined whether the operation effect period timer has timed out (S381). If the operation effect period timer has not timed out (S381; N), it is further determined whether the operation effect process timer has timed out (S382). When the effect presentation process timer has not timed out (S 382; N), according to the contents of the operation presentation process data corresponding to the action presentation process timer being executed, the operation presentation (the effect display device 5 as a presentation component, the presentation Control of the various LEDs as parts for the components and the speakers 8L and 8R as parts for the effect is executed, and the process proceeds to S387 (S383).

  If the operation effect process timer has timed out (S382; Y), the operation effect process data is switched (S384), and the next operation effect process timer is started (S385). Then, according to the contents of the process data for action effect corresponding to the process timer for the next action effect (action effect display device 5 as part for effect, various LEDs as part for effect, speakers 8L and 8R as parts for effect Control) and proceeds to S387 (S386).

  Then, at S387, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not it is the display mode change timing of the hold display or the active display. If it is not the display mode change timing of the hold display or the active display (S387; N), the effect presentation is ended, and if it is the display mode change timing of the hold display or the active display (S387; Y), the CPU 120 for effect control starts In the winning reception command buffer 194A or the active display storage buffer 194B, the value of the change destination flag according to the hold display or the active display targeted for the hold display advance presentation effect is the hold display or active for the hold display advance presentation effect. It sets as a value of a display mode flag according to display, and ends an operation production process (S388).

  As described above, after the value of the display mode flag is set to the value of the change destination flag in S 388 of the effect and effect processing, the pending display / active display update process (S 905) is executed to target the pending display advance notice effect The display mode of the hold display or the active display, which is the hold display or the active display, is updated to the display mode of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. If the action effect period timer has timed out in S381 described above (S381; Y), the action effect in-progress flag is cleared and the action effect process is ended (S389).

  In the variable display in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when the variable display is started, the hold display / active display transition effect is executed and the movement of the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D is To be done. Then, after the suspension display / active display transition effect is ended, when the execution of the operation effect is determined in the variable display, the operation effect is performed. When the variable display is a target change of the display mode change of the suspension display or the active display (when the value of the shift number counter is 0), the display mode of the suspension display or the active display at the end timing of the operation effect Changes from the display pattern α to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

  In addition, when the said fluctuation | variation display is a fluctuation | variation pattern of reach (normal reach or super reach), an effect presentation is complete | finished in the timing before the start of reach production. That is, during the reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) in the present embodiment, the execution of the action effect is limited. As described above, since the game can be made to pay attention to the reach effect by restricting the execution of the effect effect during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach effect from being lowered by the execution of the effect effect.

  Next, an effect aspect in the effect display device 5 in the present embodiment will be described based on FIG. 40 to FIG. First, FIG. 40A exemplifies a state in which the number of pending storages is three and variation display of the effect design is being performed. In addition, in FIG. 40 (A), based on the fact that the number of pending storages is 3 (three pending displays are displayed in the pending storage display area 5D), the LED of the pending display number correspondence indicator 31 is Three lights are on.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), when the start winning is generated during the variable display, the first start winning effect is suspended from the character image C displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 The movement of the hold display toward the hold 4 display position of the storage display area 5D is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (C) and FIG. 40 (D), the effect display is derived and displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the end of the fluctuation display during the first start winning effect. Then, the next variable display is started. At this time, the hold display displayed on the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D is moved toward the active display area 5F as an active display by executing the hold display / active display transition effect. The hold display displayed at the hold 2 display position of the hold storage display area 5D moves toward the hold 1 display position, and the hold display displayed at the hold 3 display position of the hold storage display area 5D is the hold 3 display position Move towards

  Thus, when the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D moves to the upper display position during the first start winning effect, that is, when the number of held memories decreases during the first start winning effect Since the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of S285 of the start winning effect processing (see FIG. 27) to redetermine the destination position of the pending display on the move as the first start winning effect, the first start winning effect As shown in FIG. 40 (E), the hold display during movement can reach the redetermined move destination position (the hold 3 display position in the example shown in FIG. 40).

  Further, when the variation display being executed is the change target of the display mode of the active display and the variation of the super reach, first, as shown in FIG. 41 (A) and FIG. 41 (B), the action presentation is executed The display mode of the active display changes. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41 (C) to 41 (E), when the super reach effect is started after the effect design is displayed in combination of reach, the character image C in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 is displayed. It is hidden. As described above, the super reach effect of the present embodiment is a so-called battle effect in which the character of the character image C plays against the enemy character.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), when a new start winning combination occurs during the super reach effect, the character image C is not displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 5, so the first start winning effect Is not executed, a new hold display is displayed in the hold storage display area 5D. Then, after the execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. At this time, the character image C is displayed again in the upper left portion of the effect display device 5.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character image C is erased (non-displayed) from the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 during the execution period of the super reach effect. As shown in FIG. 43C, temporarily, if the display of the character image C is maintained at the upper left portion of the effect display device 5 to execute the first start winning effect even during the super reach effect, the character of the character image C This is because the same character is displayed in the super reach effect, so it becomes difficult to determine which is the super reach effect character.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is assumed that the number of pending display items displayed in the pending storage display area 5D is reduced by the start of new variable display during execution of the first start winning effect. Also, since it is possible to redetermine the destination position of the pending display being moved as the first start winning effect, the player is given a sense of discomfort by the interruption of the first start winning effect being executed, and the first start winning effect is It is possible to prevent that the rendering effect due to

  In addition, by moving the hold display and the active display at the same speed in the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect, the effect period and the hold display and active in the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect Since the moving length (moving distance) of the display can be made different, performing the first start winning effect and the second start winning effect in an appropriate manner according to the destination position of the pending display or the active display. Can.

  In the first embodiment, in the first start winning effect, an example is shown in which the effect time of the first start winning effect and the moving length (moving distance) of the hold display are different according to the move destination position of the hold display. The present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the effect time of the first start winning effect and the moving length (moving distance) of the holding display is constant regardless of the moving destination position of the holding display. It is also good.

  In addition, when it is possible to display the hold display or the active display during movement as the first start winning effect or the second start winning effect by the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the lighting color of the hold display mode corresponding LED 30 Since it is possible to make the player recognize that the on-move display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, a suspension display area 5D for displaying the suspension display on the effect display device 5 and an active display area 5F for displaying an active display corresponding to the fluctuation display being executed are provided, and the fluctuation display is started. At the same time, as the hold display / active display transition effect, the hold display displayed at the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D is moved as the active display toward the active display area 5F, and the hold 2 display position ~ By moving the hold display displayed in the hold 8 display position toward the display position higher by one, it can be easily understood which fluctuation display corresponds to which hold display.

  In the present embodiment, a mode is provided in which a suspension storage display area 5D for displaying the suspension display on the effect display device 5 and an active display area 5F for displaying the active display corresponding to the variation display being executed are provided. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 5 may not be provided with the active display area 5F. In addition, when the effect display area 5F is not provided in the effect display device 5 as described above, the pending display displayed in the pending 1 display position is erased each time a new variable display is started in the pending storage display area 5D. The hold display displayed in the hold 2 display position to the hold 8 display position may be moved toward the display position higher by one.

  When a new start winning combination occurs while the number of pending storages is 0 and non-execution of variable display, the pending display is moved from character image C to pending storage display area 5D as a second start winning effect, and then The movement toward the active display area 5F allows the player to recognize that a new hold storage has occurred.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data for executing the first start winning effect and data for executing the second start winning effect are separately provided, the present invention is limited to this. Instead of using the data for executing the first start winning effect as the second start winning effect, move the hold display from the character image C to the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D, and then The hold display may be moved from the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D toward the active display area 5F using the data for the second start winning presentation.

  In this way, the data for moving the hold display from the character image C to the hold 1 display position of the hold storage display area 5D can be shared between the first start winning effect and the second start win effect, so that the start It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the winning presentation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, since the effect presentation is executed after the execution of the suspension display / active display transition presentation during the variable display, the operation presentation is performed for the suspension display during movement as the suspension display / active display transition presentation. Can be performed, and the process for executing the effect presentation can be simplified. Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the effect presentation is not executed for the suspension display during movement as the suspension display / active display transition effect, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the effect presentation may be performed on the pending display during movement as the pending display / active display transition effect.

  In addition, during the execution of the super reach effect, by not executing the first start winning effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game interest due to the first start effect being executed during the execution of the super reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the super reach production of super reach α, where the ratio of the variation display result to the big hit is lower than the super reach production of super reach β, the first start A prize effect may be executed. In addition, even if it is possible to execute an advance notice effect for giving notice that the change display result will be a big hit during the change display, the first start winning effect is not executed even during the execution of the notice effect other than the super reach effect You may do so.

  In the present embodiment, as the first start winning effect, it reaches until the new hold display is displayed at the move destination position (one of the hold 1 display position to the hold 8 display position) corresponding to the hold storage number However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first start winning effect does not include display until the hold display is displayed at the move destination position corresponding to the number of held memories. Good. Furthermore, when executing the first start winning effect as in the present embodiment, a new hold display is performed by restricting the execution of a new first start winning effect during movement of the hold display as the first start winning effect. Can be displayed on the destination position corresponding to the number of pending storages.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (D) and FIG. 41 (E), in the present embodiment, when a new start winning combination occurs during execution of the super reach effect, the first start based on the new starting winning combination The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the additional display of the new hold display in the hold storage display area 5D and the additional lighting of the new LED in the hold display number corresponding display 31 are performed without executing the prize effect. Is not limited to this, and when a new start winning combination occurs during execution of the super reach effect, a first start winning effect based on the new start winning and a new hold display in the hold storage display area 5D Alternatively, only the additional lighting of the new LED in the hold display number correspondence display 31 may be performed without executing the additional display of. Furthermore, the number of pending storages can be displayed as a number at a predetermined position such as the upper right portion of the effect display device 5, and when a new start winning is generated during execution of the super reach effect, the second based on the new start winning 1 Start winning effect, additional display of new pending display in the pending storage display area 5D, additional lighting of new LED in the pending display number corresponding display 31 is not performed, and at a predetermined position such as the upper right portion of the effect display device 5 Only the display of the number of pending storages may be updated.

  In addition, since the display mode of the hold display or the active display may or may not change according to the execution of the action effect, the player is made to pay attention to whether the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes. be able to. Furthermore, the rate at which the display mode of the on-hold display or the active display changes differs between when the effect is performed in the effect pattern A and in the case where the effect pattern B is performed, and Since the rate at which the display mode changes to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ is also different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which effect pattern of effect presentation is performed.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. Be

  For example, in the embodiment described above, when the number of pending storages is 0 and non-execution of the variable display is performed, the second starting winning effect is performed based on the occurrence of the new start winning, thereby displaying the pending display. Although the character image C is moved from the character image C to the active display area 5F via the reserved storage display area 5D, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a first modification, FIGS. As shown in (B), when a new start winning combination occurs while the number of pending storages is 0 and non-execution of variable display, the pending display is activated without executing the second start winning effect The display may be displayed in the active display area 5F as a display, or as a second start winning effect, the hold display may be directly activated from the character image C without passing through the hold storage display area 5D. May be moved to indicate the area 5F, By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period from the new starting winning occurs until the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F.

  Furthermore, when a new start winning combination occurs when the number of pending storages is 0 and non-execution of variable display is performed, from the vicinity of the pending 1 display position in the pending storage display area 5D as a second start winning effect. The hold display may be moved toward the active display area 5F, that is, part of the second start winning effect of the embodiment may be performed.

  Further, in the embodiment, the display of the hold display or the active display is carried out by executing the action effect on the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 5D or the active display displayed in the active display area 5F. Although the form which changes a mode was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect production is performed to a pending display moving toward a retention memory display area 5D or an active display area 5F as a start winning prize effect. The display mode of the hold display or the active display may be changed by execution.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 45 (A) to 45 (D) as the second modification, a movable body movable in the left and right direction is provided on the left side of the effect display device 5. Then, based on the occurrence of the start winning, the hold display is moved from the character image C to the hold storage display area 5D as a first start winning effect, and the hold display during movement is concealed by the movement of the movable body. As shown in FIGS. 45 (A) to 45 (D), in the second modification, the movable object hides the pending display moving from the character image C to the pending storage display area 5D as the first start winning effect. In the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, the character image C is transferred from the character image C to the active display area 5F via the suspension storage display area 5D as the second start winning effect. The moving display may hide the active indication moving toward the direction. That is, in the second modification, concealment of the hold display and the active display by the movable body corresponds to the action effect.

  As described above, when the holding display or the active display moving from the character image C toward the holding storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F as the start winning effect is concealed by the movable body, the holding display is concealed by the movable body. By changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at the timing, from the player, the display mode of the hold display or the active display passing behind the movable body is from the display pattern α Since it is recognized that the display pattern β or the display pattern γ has been changed, the player can be made to pay attention to the hold display or the active display during movement from the character image C, and the game interest can be improved. Furthermore, since an action effect may be executed on a hold display or an active display moving from character image C toward hold storage display area 5D or active display area 5F as a start winning game effect, a character image as a start winning game effect It is possible to make the player pay attention to the hold display or the active display moving from C to the hold storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F.

  Further, as a start winning effect, the suspension display or the active display moving from the character image C toward the suspension storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F passes behind the movable body in a state of being concealed by the movable body. Since the player can visually recognize from the player, the player can be made to pay attention to the period in which the hold display or the active display is moving behind the movable body. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45, the operation of the movable body is performed when the movable display hides the held display or the active display moving from the character image C to the held storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F as a start winning effect. As a result, it is possible to give the player a high stage effect as an action effect.

  In the second modification, as the operation effect, an effect of concealing a hold display or an active display moving from the character image C toward the hold storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F is performed by operating the movable body. Although the embodiment has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the effect, as shown in FIG. 46, the character image C to the suspension storage display area 5D or the active according to the image displayed on the effect display device 5 It is also possible to hide the hold display or the active display moving toward the display area 5F, and to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed only once by executing the action effect on the hold display or the active display, but the present invention is limited to this. The display mode of the hold display or the active display may be changed two or more times. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, by executing the effect presentation on the hold display or the active display which is the display pattern α, the display mode of the hold display or the active display can be set to either the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. Although the changeable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the hold display or the active display which is the display pattern α is three or more display patterns (for example, the display pattern β or the display pattern) In addition to γ, it is possible to change the pending display or the active display to a display pattern δ to be displayed in a black star shape (★) in which the ratio of the variation display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is higher than the display pattern γ. It may be.

  As described above, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display can be changed a plurality of times and the display mode of the hold display or the active display can be changed to the display patterns of three or more, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 47 (E), action effects can be executed with effect pattern A and effect pattern B in which the change ratio of the suspension display and the active display is different, and FIGS. 47 (F) to 47 (G) As shown in the drawing, the effect pattern may be made executable by changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display into a specific display pattern by acting on the hold display or the active display.

  Specifically, in the case of executing effect presentation with effect pattern A or effect pattern B, the display mode of the hold display or the active display can be changed to all of display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. In the case of executing the effect in the effect pattern C, the display mode of the hold display or the active display may be changed to the display pattern δ at a rate of 100%. That is, the effect presentation in this modification corresponds to the change presentation in the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the third modification, as a function effect of the effect pattern C, the display pattern of the hold display is displayed by causing the black star to act on the hold display of the display pattern β. Although a mode is shown in which the change is made to δ, that is, the change from the display pattern β to the display pattern δ with the highest ratio of the display result becoming a big hit without passing through the display pattern γ, the present invention is limited thereto The effect of the effect pattern C is not the effect pattern of the effect pattern C if it is an effect that changes the display mode of the on hold display or the active display to a predetermined display pattern by acting on the on hold display or the active display. The display pattern to which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes due to the effect presentation may be the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. In this manner, the player can be made to pay attention to the action effect by enabling the effect pattern C to change the display mode of the hold display to the specific display pattern as the effect pattern of the action effect. It is possible to improve the presentation effects of the presentation and the fun of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47 as the third modification, when the display effect of the hold display or the active display can be changed a plurality of times by executing the effect presentation plural times for the hold display or the active display. Is the display pattern of the hold display or the active display by sequentially executing the action effect as effect pattern A → effect pattern B → effect pattern C, display pattern α → display pattern β → display pattern γ → display pattern δ The case of changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display from the display pattern α to the display pattern β without passing through the display pattern β and the display pattern γ by executing only the effect pattern C when changing in order By providing it, the player may be made to pay attention to the effect pattern of the action effect.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment illustrated the form which determines whether effect presentation is performed for every start of a fluctuation display, this invention is not limited to this, The opportunity which determines execution of an effect presentation May be other than the start timing of the variable display. For example, as a fourth modification, the execution of the effect presentation may be determined with the upper limit being that the number of suspended memories has reached a specific value such as the upper limit (8 in the present embodiment) during the variable display. In this way, when it is determined that the effect presentation is performed with the upper limit having reached a specific value such as the upper limit value during the variable display, the operation effect is executed in the next variable display, and the suspension is performed. If there is a pending display of the target of the pending display advance notice effect in the display, the display mode of the pending display may be changed at the end timing of the action effect. By doing this, it is possible to promote the game to the player so that a new holding memory is stored.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, when there is a hold display in which the execution of the hold display effect is already determined in the hold display, the hold display newly displayed due to the occurrence of the start winning is Although the form which is not the object of suspension display notice production is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and makes a plurality of suspension displays object of suspension display notice production, that is, in suspension storage display area 5D A plurality of pending displays may be displayed as the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. As described above, when a plurality of pending displays are to be subjected to the pending display notification effect, the pending display mode corresponding LED 30 is the color according to the pending display in which the display mode is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ first. May be maintained, and the lighting color of the hold display mode corresponding LED 30 may be maintained until the start or end of the variable display corresponding to the hold display, or any display mode of the hold display may be the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The emission color of the hold display mode corresponding LED 30 may be updated each time it changes.

  Further, in the above embodiment, regardless of the starting winning opening where the starting winning combination has occurred, the embodiment is exemplified in which the holding display according to the holding storage based on the starting winning is additionally displayed in the holding storage display area 5D. The invention is not limited to this, and two suspension storage display areas are provided in the effect display device 5, and the suspension display and the second according to the suspension storage based on the starting winning combination generated by the winning on the first starting winning opening. The on-hold display corresponding to the on-hold storage based on the start-up winning generated by the start-up winning combination may be additionally displayed in different on-hold storage display areas.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form is shown in which the variable display is performed in the order of the generated retention memory regardless of the start winning opening where the start winning is generated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to prioritize and execute one of the variable display based on the pending storage generated by the winning to the first start winning opening and the variable display based on the pending storage generated by the winning to the second starting winning opening In addition, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display based on the holding storage generated by the winning of the first start winning opening and the variable display based on the holding storage generated by the winning of the second starting winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, when the newly generated pending display is determined to be the target of the pending display notification effect and the number of shifts is determined to be 0, it is displayed in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ as the start winning effect. The present embodiment exemplifies a mode of moving the on-hold display and the active display toward the on-hold storage display area 5D and the on-active display area 5F, but the invention is not limited thereto. When it is determined that the target of the effect is given and the number of shifts is determined to be 0, the pending display or active display displayed in the display pattern α as the start winning effect is moved toward the pending storage display area 5D or the active display area 5F And the hold display and the active display reach the movement destination position (the hold storage display area 5D and the active display area 5F). In particular may be changed to the display pattern β or display pattern γ a display mode of these hold display or an active display based.

  For example, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, gaming balls having a predetermined number of balls are inside the gaming machine In addition, the number of balls that have been enclosed so as to be able to circulate and is lent out in response to a player's request for lending, and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of gaming balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the gaming balls but points or points are awarded to the player, so the points or points given are the game values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 120 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect, an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern designation command when the fluctuation is started Although shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU 120 for effect control by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses, for example, the first command, a fluctuation time or fluctuation mode before reaching reach (before reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching reach). The second command indicates the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after reaching a so-called second stop if not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence of re-lottery effect. The command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time may be notified by the first command and the second command, and the CPU 120 for effect control regarding the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. The selection may be made by When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. As described above, by notifying a change pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which must be stored as a change pattern specification command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the game ball is shot out from below the game area by the ball striking device, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball striking device may be pachinko game machine 1 The game ball may be launched from the upper position of the game area by providing the game ball at the upper position of the game area.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment is exemplified in which only the big hit that can obtain many game balls is generated by opening the big winning opening in the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation big hit B is significantly shortened, the opening time of the big winning opening in the round game is remarkably shortened, and the occurrence of the probability variation big hitting B suddenly causes the player not to recognize that the big winning opening is opened. It may be a sudden big hit that appears to have become a definite change state. In addition, when making these definite variation big hit B the high definite probability big hit, the small hit opening the big winning opening with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the big hit game of the positive variation big hit B, It is possible to generate a state (so-called latent state) in which it is unclear whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probability variation big hit B or the small hit is in the high certainty state or the low certainty state.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the form in which the starting winning opening is made into two, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting winning opening is The number of start winning openings may be three or more.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which made the special symbol two in 1st special drawing and 2nd special drawing is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, Only one special symbol is one It is good also as three or more special symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B respectively variably display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol as a display result, and then stop the final stop symbol Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention stops display of the final stop design after variably displaying a plurality of special symbols without including the final stop design as a display result. It may be That is, the final stop symbol to be the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

  The state advantageous to the player includes specific game states (such as a big hit) that are advantageous to the player who can acquire many game media, and plural types of specific game states (such as different expected values of game media that can be acquired) Big hit etc. with different number of rounds), high base state (time saving state) where the condition of award ball payout is more easily established than in normal gaming state, high probability gaming state (high probability state) And a special reach state (eg, super reach), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. The specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display and capable of controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes S109 and S110 in the start winning process shown in FIG. 12) and the hold storage stored in the hold storage means Hold display means (for example, the hold control process shown by FIG. 21 for the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 31 (particularly, the hold shown in FIG. 31) that can display the hold display corresponding to the corresponding position (eg, hold 1 display position Part that executes display / active display transition effect processing) and specific effects (for example, super reach Specific effect execution means capable of executing (for example, a portion where the CPU for effect control 120 executes the process during effect symbol variation shown in FIG. 37), and the hold display means newly stores hold memory In addition, it is possible to execute the appearance display (for example, the first start winning presentation effect) of the hold display corresponding to the new suspension storage over a predetermined period (for example, the first start winning game shown in FIG. When a new hold storage is stored during execution of the specific effect, the execution of the appearance display is limited (for example, in the hold display preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 23). If the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the super reach effect is being executed in S261, the first start winning effect executing flag is not set, and the on-hold display notice effect is determined. Since the process is ended, it is determined that the first start winning effect executing flag is not set in S282 of the start winning effect process shown in FIG. 27 and the portion where the first start winning effect execution process of S286 is not executed), A first control unit (for example, the main board 9011) for outputting a command based on a lottery (for example, a variation pattern specification command), and a process according to a command output by the first control unit (for A second control unit (for example, effect control board 9012) that executes step S90171), which is processing, and the second control unit performs a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern specification commands “8100” to “8102”) Treats “) as the same command (for example, variation pattern specification command“ 8100 ”) and executes the above processing ( In the step S90752, the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are converted to “8100” (also refer to FIG. 64), and the game machine is treated as the “8100” and executes step S90171).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the appearance display being executed during the specific effect. Further, since the processing is performed by treating a plurality of different commands as the same command, the second control means can be suitably operated.
Note that the appearance display may or may not include a habit of displaying the hold display corresponding to the new hold storage at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of hold storages. Furthermore, in the case where the appearance display includes the habit of displaying the holding display corresponding to the new holding storage at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of holding memories, the holding corresponding to the new holding storage is restricted by restricting the execution display. The display can be prevented from being displayed at the corresponding position corresponding to the number of pending storages.

  Further, the first control means and the second control means may be configured of a plurality of hardware (substrate or processor). Further, at least a part of the first control means and the second control means may be configured by a common hardware configuration.

  For example, in the embodiment described later, the main substrate 9011 is provided with a portion for converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100” (a portion where the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752). It is also good. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”. Then, the CPU 90103 supplies the converted command to the effect control board 9012. Thus, the second control means may include a portion of the main substrate 9011.

  For example, in the embodiment to be described later, the common module 90120A is realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120. You may do so. As described above, the part that handles different plural commands as the same command in the second control means and the part that executes processing may be realized by different hardware.

  The process according to the command may be a process of executing an effect (a process executed by the display control unit 90123) in addition to the process of determining an effect to be executed. In addition, treating a plurality of commands as the same command means treating a plurality of commands as another command other than the plurality of commands in addition to treating the plurality of commands as one of the plurality of commands. Including. Also, treating a plurality of commands as the same command may be realized by converting the command as in the embodiment described later, or executing the same processing for a plurality of commands (thereby making the same command It may be realized by

  Furthermore, a command based on a lottery can be suppressed as an example of a form of a gaming machine which can suppress a decrease in game interest due to the appearance display being executed during a specific effect, and can operate the second control means suitably. First control means (for example, the main board 9011) for outputting (for example, a variation pattern specification command) and processing according to the command output by the first control means (for example, step S90171) And second control means (for example, effect control board 9012) for executing the second control means, the second control means performs a plurality of different commands (for example, variation pattern specification commands “8100” to “8102”) The above process is executed by treating it as (for example, fluctuation pattern designation command “8100”) (for example, fluctuation in step S90752) Converts turn specification command "8101" - the "8102" to "8100" (see FIG. 64 also), and executes steps S90171 treated as the "8100") the gaming machine and the like. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings.
(Configuration etc. of pachinko gaming machine 901)
FIG. 48 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a game area is formed, and in this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  Variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. These are formed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  In addition, "variable display" of special symbols is, for example, changing (displaying in a variable manner) a plurality of types of special symbols by update display or the like (the same applies to variable displays of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stop-displayed (also referred to as a derived display etc.) as a display result (variable display result) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). In addition, scroll display, a deformation | transformation, expansion / contraction etc. may be performed as a fluctuation | variation of a pattern (especially decoration pattern mentioned later).

  In the following, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B is the "second special symbol" It is also called. Also, a special drawing game using the first special drawing is referred to as "first special drawing game", and a special drawing game using the second special drawing is also referred to as "second special drawing game".

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and displays various effect images.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, a decorative symbol (such as a symbol indicating a numeral or the like) as a plurality of kinds of decorative identification information different from the special symbol in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game. Variable display is performed. As an example, in the image display device 905, in synchronization with the first special view game or the second special view game, the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Are variably displayed (for example, scroll display or update display in the vertical direction).

  In addition, display areas 905HL and 905HR are also arranged on the screen of the image display device 905, and the display area 905HL is a first hold display image corresponding to the first special drawing game whose execution is being held (here, The image of a circle is displayed right-justified, and the second hold display image (here, the image of a circle) corresponding to the second special-play game whose execution is suspended is displayed left-aligned in the display area 905HR. Ru. The first hold display image and the second hold display image are collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  In addition, the number of reservations for a special drawing game is also referred to as a number of special drawing reservations. In particular, the number of reservations for the first special view game is referred to as the number of first special illustration reservations. The number of reservations for the second special view game is referred to as the second special view reservation storage number. The number of first reserved display images indicates a first special map reserved memory number, and the number of second reserved display images indicates a second special image reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A is the number of first special view hold memories depending on the number of lighted LEDs. Is displayed, and the second hold display 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Under the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

  The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state where a game ball can always enter by means of a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start opening switch 9022A (see FIG. 49) is turned on, whereby the entry of the game ball is detected (in this case, a predetermined number (for example, three) The first special figure game can be started as the prize ball of) is paid out.

  The normally variable winning ball device 906B is an electric tulip type wheeler having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 49) for a normal electric character. An object (usually a motorized role) is provided to form a second start winning opening. In the normally variable winning ball device 906B, for example, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, the tip of the movable wing piece approaches the normal winning ball device 906A and the second start winning It will be in the closing state where the game ball does not enter into the mouth (the second starting winning opening will be in the closing state). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball device 906 B is in an open state where the gaming ball can enter the second start winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 is in the on state (second It is also said that the starting winning opening will be in an open state). When the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening, the second starting opening switch 9022 B (see FIG. 49) is turned on, whereby the entry of the gaming ball is detected (in this case, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the second special game can be started.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 49) serving as a special winning opening door, and it is specified that the special winning opening door changes into an open state and a closed state. Form a big winning opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball enters the big winning mouth (for example, Do not pass. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily enters the big winning mouth Become.

  When the gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the count switch 9023 (see FIG. 49) is turned on, whereby the entry of the gaming ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as award balls. Thus, when the game ball enters the special winning opening, for example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening.

  An ordinary symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 48, the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is made up of seven segments of LEDs and the like, and variable display of ordinary symbols (also referred to as "common drawing" or "ordinary drawing") as plural kinds of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Do. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a common-play game (also referred to as a "normal-figure game").

  The regular game is executed based on the game ball having passed the passing gate 9041. When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 9041, the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 49 is turned on, whereby the passage of the gaming ball is detected.

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C is provided. The common drawing suspension display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing reservation storages, which is the number of common drawing games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 909 for gaming effects is provided in the periphery of the gaming area ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to eject a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area by the striking device. There is.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a lower tray for holding (storing) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

(Board configuration)
For example, a main board 9011 as shown in FIG. 49, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015 and the like are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, a power supply substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (special game, execution of regular game, management of suspension, big hit gaming state described later, etc.). The main substrate 9011 includes a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104, and an I / O (Input / output port) 90105.

  The CPU 90103 executes a program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform processing to control the progress of the game (processing to realize the function of the main substrate 9011). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (variation pattern (FIG. 54. Details will be described later), effect control command (FIG. 51. Details will be described later), data such as various tables) are used, and RAM 90102 is used as a main memory. Ru.

  The random number circuit 90104 is capable of updating numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated (updated by software) as the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 90105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (solenoid drive signals to be described later, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, normal symbol display And an output port for transmitting signals for controlling (driving) the first hold indicator 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, and the like.

  The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal (gaming medium passes) from various switches (gate switch 9021, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), count switch 9023) for gaming ball detection. A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on is entered and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100).

  The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the microcomputer 90100 for game control to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character product or the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door. Transmit

  The main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100) supplies the effect control command (command for specifying the progress of the game, etc.) to the effect control board 9012 according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Do. The effect control command output from the main substrate 9011 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015 and supplied to the effect control substrate 9012.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011. The effect control board 9012 receives an effect control command, and various effects (notifies the progress of the game, or the game based on the effect control command received) And a function to execute a variable display of a decorative pattern).

  On the effect control board 9012, an effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 90120 executes a program stored in the ROM 90121 to perform processing for executing effects together with the display control unit 90123. At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 are used, and the RAM 90122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control unit CPU 90120 operates as the common module 90120A and the effect execution instructing unit 90120B shown in FIG. 50 by executing the process for executing the effect.

  The common module 90120A executes effect control command analysis processing (step S90704 in FIG. 57; details will be described later) and sound and lamp control processing (step S90706 in FIG. 57: details will be described later). The effect control command analysis process analyzes the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to specify which effect control command the command is, and the process according to the specified effect control command (analysis result) It is a process to be performed. The sound and lamp control process is a process for controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and the on / off of the game effect lamp 909.

  The common module 90120A supplies, to the voice control board 9013, a sound designation signal for specifying the sound to be output (including only the sound) in the sound and lamp control processing. The voice control board 9013 has various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let Thus, the common module 90120A controls the audio output via the audio control board 9013.

  Further, the common module 90120A supplies a lamp signal for designating the on / off mode of the game effect lamp 909 to the lamp control board 9014 in the sound and lamp control process. The lamp control board 9014 has various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Do. Thus, the common module 90120A controls the on / off of the lamps via the lamp control board 9014.

  The effect execution instructing unit 90120B executes an effect control process (step S90705 in FIG. 57; details will be described later). In the effect control process, the execution of the image system effect is determined based on the effect control command specified by the analysis by the common module 90120A (for example, it is determined by lottery), and the execution of the image system effect determined to be executed ( Is a process of instructing the display control unit 90123 to start execution. The image system effect is an effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 905, and appropriately includes sound output in accordance with the effect image, and on / off of the game effect lamp 909 in accordance with the effect image.

  The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the image system rendering based on the execution instruction of the image system rendering from the rendering control CPU 90120 Start. In the execution of the image-based effect, for example, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 905 by supplying a video signal. In addition, the display control unit 90123 supplies an instruction to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R and an instruction to turn on / off the game effect lamp 909 to the common module 90120A when executing image system effects. The common module 90120A outputs the above-mentioned sound designation signal and lamp signal according to these instructions. That is, the display control unit 90123 controls the sound output included in the image effect and the turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909 through the common module 90120A.

  Note that the common module 90120A outputs the above-mentioned sound designation signal and lamp signal based on the effect control command specified by analysis, so that the sound output and the game effect lamp 909 are turned on independently of the display control unit 90123. It is also possible to control turning on / off (for example, when receiving a symbol determination designating command described later, the game effect lamp 909 is lit, etc.).

  The random number circuit 90124 counts up the numerical data indicating the various random number values (rendering effect random numbers) used when controlling the rendering operation. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) as the effect control CPU 90120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of

(Progress of the game etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is fired toward the game area by the player's rotation operation to the ball hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 901.

  When the game ball which has flowed down the game area passes through the passage gate 9041, a common drawing game (variable display of a normal symbol) is started. It should be noted that, when the standard drawing game can not be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as under open control described below when another common drawing game is already executed, the common drawing game is limited to four etc. Execution is suspended. The reserved regular game is executed when the start condition for starting the regular game (for example, no other regular game is being executed or the opening control is not performed). When the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 9041 when the number of common drawing holding memories reaches the upper limit value, the number of common drawing holding memories does not increase, and the passing is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the common-play game include a per-common-pattern (for example, a common drawing such as "7") and a common-use lost symbol (for example, a common drawing such as "-"). . When the symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) per common drawing, it is when the variable display result is "per common drawing". In the case where the common drawing losing symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "general drawing lost".

  In the case of "per common drawing", the open control (the second start winning opening is opened) in which the movable wing piece of the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilting position for a predetermined period is performed. The open control is not performed in the case of "general drawing loss".

  When the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area enters the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first special view game is started. Further, when the gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second special figure game is started. It should be noted that when the special figure game can not be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed, or is controlled to the big hit gaming state described later The execution of the special drawing game is suspended with the upper limit etc. The reserved special drawing game is executed when a start condition for starting the special drawing game is established (for example, no other special drawing game is not executed and the jackpot gaming state is not in progress).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the number of first special view reservations (the number of first special games held) has reached the upper limit value, the number of first special reservations increases. If not, the entry is nullified (a prize ball may be present). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the number of the second special view reserve memory (number of the second special view game reserved) reaches the upper limit, the number of the second special figure reserve memory increases If not, the entry is nullified (a prize ball may be present).

  The entry (winning) of the gaming ball to the first starting winning opening that increases the number of first special view holding memories is also referred to as the first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the gaming ball to the second starting winning opening that increases the second special view reservation memory number is also referred to as the second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  There are a big hit design (for example, special figures such as "3" and "7") and a lost design (for example, special figures such as "-") in the variable display result stopped and displayed in the special figure game. . When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), it is when the variable display result is "big hit". When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display result is "lost".

  When the variable display result of the first special view game or the second special view game is "big hit" (specific display result), the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is "losing", it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the open state. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the timing at which the number of gaming balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine), whichever is earlier. It will be continued. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply referred to as a "round"). In the jackpot gaming state, the round game is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (in the period other than the round game, the big winning opening is closed).

  The "big hit" is set to a big hit type of "non-deterministic change" or "precise change". When the jackpot type is "non-deterministic change", the jackpot symbol of "3" is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot type is "probable", the jackpot symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, "big hit" when the big hit type is "probable variation" may be referred to as "probably big hit", and "big hit" when the big hit type is "non-probable variation" may be referred to as "non-probable big hit". Moreover, the big hit gaming state based on the "probable big hit" may be referred to as the "probably big hit gaming state". Moreover, the big hit gaming state based on the "non-probable variation big hit" may be referred to as the "non-probability big hit gaming state".

  After the definite variation big hit gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a high probability state higher than the normal state. The definite change state continues until the next big hit gaming state is started.

  After the definite variation big hit gaming state or the non definite variation big hit gaming state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to a short time state that becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, one of the ending conditions of the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) and the start of the next big hit gaming state is established first. Continue until you do.

  In the time saving state, the game ball can enter the second start winning opening more easily than the non-time saving state in which the time saving state such as the normal state is not established, the normally variable winning ball device 906B is opened and closed And may be changed. For example, control to make the variation time of a normal symbol in a regular game (the period of variable display of a regular pattern, also referred to as a regular variation time), shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each regular game It is sufficient to change the normally variable winning ball device 906B between the open state and the closed state in a favorable change mode by control or the like that improves the probability that the result is “per common” than in the normal state. Such control is referred to as high open control (also referred to as "time-saving control" or "high base control"). By being controlled to such a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to be "big hit" is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  Note that the normal state is a gaming state other than the advantageous state for the player such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and the variable display result in the common drawing game is The pachinko gaming machine 901 such as the probability of being hit and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g. It is a state controlled in the same way as when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the closing.

  The short time state is also referred to as "high base" and the like, and the gaming state not in the short time state is also referred to as "low base" or "non-short time state". A definite change state is said to be "high certainty" or the like, and a gaming state not definite change state is also referred to as "low certainty", "non-deterministic change" or the like.

(Progress of progress etc.)
The "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the image display device 905 correspond to the start of the first special view game or the second special view game. The variable display of the decorative pattern (which is also a type of image effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special view game and the second special view game, the finalized decorative symbol (variable display result) that is the display result (variable display result) of the decorative symbol The combination of the three decorative designs is also displayed on the stop display (derivative display).

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established) in a period from when the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable symbol is displayed. Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative pattern ("reach variation not displayed yet when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. The symbol “also referred to as a symbol” refers to a display mode in which the variation continues.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reach effect (an example of the image system effect) is executed corresponding to the reach mode being displayed during the variable display. As reach effects, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B, which have different presentation modes, are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, a ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is a "big hit", and here, it is also a ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "big hit".

  When the variable display result of the special view game is "big hit", a finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 as the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "big hit"). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R on the predetermined effective line in the same decorative symbol (for example, when the probability variation big hit "7", non-deterministic variation big hit At the same time, "6" etc.) are aligned and stopped.

  When the variable display result is "loss", the fixed display pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern without the variable display mode of the decorative pattern being the reach mode. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is "loss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination which is not a big hit combination as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ("reach lost combination combination The finalized decorative pattern may also be stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as another image system effect, for example, an advance notice effect or the like for anticipating a big hit expectation is executed during variable display. In addition, during the big hit game state, for example, a big hit during the big hit game state informing the big hit game state is executed as an image-based effect. In addition, as an image-based effect, for example, a demonstration image is displayed when a special drawing game or the like is not executed.

(Main operation of pachinko gaming machine 901)
Hereinafter, main operations of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described with reference to flowcharts and the like. However, in each operation (each process), a process not described below may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
On the main board 9011, the CPU 90103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from a CTC (counter / timer circuit, not shown) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds) It is executed at a predetermined time (every 2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 90103 executes the switch process, game random number update process, special symbol process, normal symbol process process, command control process, etc., and the game control timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. Control of the game is realized by being done.

  In the switch processing, each switch is determined by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. It is determined for each switch whether or not it has been turned on (that is, whether or not the game ball has entered or passed). The result of this determination is temporarily stored in, for example, the RAM 90102 and used in special symbol process processing or normal symbol process processing.

  The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 9011 side by software.

  The special symbol process process is a process to realize the suspension or execution of the special view game, the big hit gaming state, etc. based on the determination result in the switch process etc. (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, Control of the solenoid 9082 for the first prize display 9025A, the second prize display 9025B, and the special winning opening door. In the special symbol process processing, transmission setting of the effect control command is performed according to the progress of the game. Details of the special symbol process processing will be described later.

  The normal symbol process processing realizes, based on the determination result in the switch processing, the suspension and execution of the common-play game, and the open state of the normally variable winning ball device 906B (the second start winning opening) at the time of the common-drawing. Processing (including the control of a normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C, and a solenoid 9081 for a common electric character).

  The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command transmitted and set by the special symbol process process or the like from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

(Effect control command set to send in special symbol process processing)
Next, the effect control command transmitted and set in the special symbol process process and transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 in the command control process will be described. FIG. 51 shows an example of main effect control commands. In addition, the following "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command is composed of MODE data and EXT data.

  The command 8000 (H) is a first variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the first special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (variation) of the first special figure. The command 8001 (H) is a second variation start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the second special figure game, that is, the start of the variable display (variation) of the second special figure. The first change start specification command and the second change start specification command may be collectively referred to as a change start specification command.

  The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern of the special pattern game and the variable display of the decorative symbol (see FIG. 54. Details will be described later, but the execution time (special pattern variation time) of the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative symbol It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which designates (notifies) a pattern of variable display of a symbol). A numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern is set to “XX” (the same as for the EXT data, “XX”) of the command (for example, “00” in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA1′-1). The command is transmitted at the start of the special drawing game.

  The command 8CXX (H) is a display result specifying command for specifying (notifying) whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type (that is, variable display result). The numerical value which shows a display result is set to "XX" of the said command (for example, "00" if it is "loss", "01" if it is "probable variation big hit" etc.). The command is transmitted at the start of the special drawing game.

  The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol determination designating command for designating (notifying) the end of the special figure game (that is, deriving and displaying the variable display result). The symbol determination specification command is used to specify that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is ended and the display result is derived and displayed. The command is transmitted at the end of the special drawing game.

  The command A 000 (H) is a hit start designation command for designating (notifying) the start of the jackpot gaming state (which is also the start of the fanfare). The fanfare, which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect performed during the jackpot gaming state, is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot gaming state and notifies that the jackpot gaming state has been made. This command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  The command A 300 (H) is a hit end designation command for designating (notifying) the end of the jackpot gaming state (which is also the start of the ending). The ending is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state (after a big hit during presentation), and is an effect for notifying that the big hit gaming state is ended. This command is sent at the end of the last round game.

  The command B100 (H) is a first start winning specifying command for specifying (notifying) that the first starting winning has occurred due to the game medium having entered the first starting winning opening. The command B 101 (H) is a second start winning specifying command for specifying (notifying) that the second starting winning has occurred due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first start winning designation command and the second start winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning designation command. The start winning combination designation command is transmitted when the start winning combination occurs (when the start winning combination).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first special-figure hold storage number designation command for specifying (notifying) the first special-figure hold storage number, which is the hold number of the first special-figure game. The command C1XX (H) is a second special-image hold storage number specification command for specifying (notifying) the second special-image hold storage number, which is the hold number of the second special view game. A numerical value indicating the number of pending storages is set to “XX” of the command. These commands may be generically referred to as a special map pending storage count specification command. A special figure reservation memory number designation command is transmitted when a starting winning combination occurs (when starting winning).

  The command C600 (H) is a wait for customer demonstration specification command for specifying that a demonstration image is displayed. This command is transmitted when the special drawing game is not executed.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

(Start winning determination process: step S90101)
In the CPU 90103, the first start opening switch 9022A is on (refers to the determination result of the switch processing. The same applies to the on determination of various switches) (when the game ball enters the first start opening), the first The first start winning combination occurs when the special figure reserve storage number (for example, it is counted by the first reserve storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102. The same applies hereinafter) does not reach a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). From among the random number values updated by the random number circuit 90104 or the random counter (the value is updated by the game random number updating process) provided in the RAM 90102, the special view display result (the special view game variable display result) ) A random number MR1 '(one of "1" to "65535") for determination, a random number MR2' (one of "1" to "100") for determination of a jackpot type Value) and a random number value MR3 '(any value of "1" to "1000") for determination of a variation pattern. Each random number value extracted in this manner is set as the reserve data at the top of the free entry of the first special view reserve storage unit (provided in the RAM 90102). In addition, the number of first special view reservation storages is increased by one.

  The second start port switch 9022B is on (when the game ball enters the second start port), and the second special view hold memory number (for example, the second hold memory number provided in the RAM 90102) In the case where the same is true below does not reach the predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), it is determined that the second start winning has occurred, and random number values MR1 'to MR3' are extracted. Each random number value extracted in this manner is set as the reserve data at the top of the empty entry of the second special view reserve storage unit (provided in the RAM 90102). In addition, the number of second special view reservation storages is increased by one.

  The first or second special view reserve storage unit associates random numbers MR1 with, for example, the reserve numbers “1” to “4” in the winning sequence (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first or second start winning opening. The numerical value data of 'to MR3' are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first or second special view hold storage indicates the first special view game or the second special view game for which execution is being held.

  In this embodiment, the special data game which has not been started yet (the execution is being suspended) by storing the reservation data in the first special drawing reservation storage unit or the second special drawing reservation storage unit as described above. (In particular, information related to the special drawing game. In this case, pending data) is stored as pending storage.

  Thereafter, the transmission setting of the start winning command is performed. The start winning combination command is the first starting winning combination designation command (when the first starting winning combination occurs) or the second starting winning combination designation command (when the second starting winning combination occurs), and the first special view reservation storage number specifying command (first starting combination) And a second special view reservation storage number designation command (at the time of second start winning occurrence).

  After the transmission setting, the CPU 90103 ends the start winning determination process. In the one start winning determination process, the above processing (on determination, storage of pending data, etc.) is performed for each of the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B (thereby, the first starting winning and The second start winning can be detected without exception). When both the first starting opening switch 9022A and the second starting opening switch 9022B are off, the CPU 90103 ends the starting winning determination processing as it is.

(Special symbol normal processing: Step S90110)
Special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "0". In the special symbol normal processing, CPU 90103 is stored in the top area (the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the second special view hold storage unit when the second special view hold storage count is other than "0". The numerical data of the random number values MR1 'to MR3' are read out. The read numerical data is stored in the random number buffer for variation of the RAM 90102 and temporarily stored. In this case, the number of second Tokushu Preservation storages is decremented by 1, and the contents stored in the second Toto suspension storage section are shifted. For example, the pending data stored in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the pending numbers "2" to "4") lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is advanced by one entry each shift. At this time, the variable special feature designation buffer value which is a stored value of the variable special feature designation buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is updated to “2”.

  When the number of the second special figure holding memory is "0", it is determined whether the number of the first special drawing holding memory is "0", and when the number of the first special drawing holding memory is other than "0" The numerical data of the random number values MR1 'to MR3' stored in the top area (the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1") of the first special view hold storage unit is read out. The read numerical data is stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and temporarily stored. In this case, the number of the first TOC reserve storage is decremented by 1, and the stored contents in the first TOC reserve storage are shifted in the same manner as in the second TOE reserve storage. Also, the variation special-designated buffer value is updated to “1”. The second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game by the above processing.

  After updating the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol (the special view game variable display result) is determined as either "big hit" or "loss". As an example, the first special view display result determination table (referred to in the non-deterministic state) or the second special view display result determination table (referred to in the definite state) previously prepared in the ROM 90101 is referred to Ru. Whether it is a definite change state is prepared in the RAM 90102 and specified with reference to a positive change flag which is turned on in the positive change state (the same applies hereinafter). In each special view display result determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 'for the special view display result determination is assigned to the special view display result of "big hit" or "lost" It should just be. The CPU 90103 determines the special view display result by referring to the first or second special view display result determination table based on the random number value MR1 ′ read out to the variation random number buffer (a determination value matching the random number value Let the decision result assigned to be the present decision result. Note that the CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result to be the "big hit" at a higher determination rate than in the non-probable state, when in the non-probable state. In this embodiment, to randomly determine the determination result using such random number values and a table is expressed as "determine by lottery" or the like.

  The CPU 90103 determines whether the determined special map display result is a "big hit". If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the on state. After that, the big hit type is drawn to one of a plurality of types (random number value MR3 'read to the random number buffer for variation, and the big hit type determination table prepared in the ROM 90101 and having "non-probability" and "probability" as decision results) Determined by lottery). After that, the CPU 90103 stores the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer provided in the RAM 90102.

  If the special figure display result is not a "big hit", or after storing the big hit type, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game to be executed this time is determined. As an example, when the big hit flag is off, a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final symbol. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is on, depending on the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer, one of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of big hit symbols is determined as the determined special symbol. Thereafter, the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  When the number of pending storages of the first special view game is “0”, after performing the demonstration display setting, the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demonstration display setting, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo specification command has been transmitted (for example, the RAM 90102 is provided with a flag which is turned on when the customer waiting demonstration specification command is already transmitted). , Perform the determination). At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending a customer waiting demo specification command is set, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

(Variation pattern setting process: step S90111)
The variation pattern setting process is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is “1”. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  The CPU 90103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S90261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S90261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined by lottery (step S90262). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off (step S90261; No), the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined by lottery (step S90263). The fluctuation pattern is to designate a special pattern game or an execution time of variable display of a decorative pattern (special pattern fluctuation time) or a pattern of variable display of the decorative pattern.

  FIG. 54 shows the variation pattern used in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are PA1'-1 to PA1'-3, PA2'-1 to PA2'-2, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 as fluctuation patterns at the time of losing. Moreover, there are PB3'-2-PB3'-4 as a fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 54, serial numbers (serial numbers “1” to “11”) are attached to each variation pattern.

  PA1'-1 to PA1'-3 designate non-reach. “00” to “02” are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA1′-1 to PA1′-3. PA1'-1 to PA1'-3 designate the same variation pattern, and the special figure variation time also designates the same length of time. In each variation pattern designation command for designating PA1'-2 to PA1'-3, when the effect control board 9012 is received by the common module 90120A, the EXT data "01" to "02" is "00" (PA1 ' Converted to EXT data specifying -1. That is, in the effect control board 9012, PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 are treated as PA1'-1 and various processes are performed (this handling is performed for other fluctuation pattern designation commands). Absent).

  PA2'-1 to PA2'-2 also designate non-reach. These are patterns for time shortening (with shortening) in which the special figure fluctuation time (the execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than the normal time (PA1'-1 etc.). "03" to "04" are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA2'-1 to PA2'-2.

  PA3'-2 and PB3'-2 designate execution of normal reach, PA3'-3 and PB3'-3 designate execution of super reach A, PA3'-4 and PB3'-4 designate super Specify the execution of reach B. “05” to “0A” are sequentially set in the EXT data of each variation pattern designation command that designates PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 and PB3′-2 to PB3′-4.

  In the lottery in step S90262, for example, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (a decision value for realizing the determination ratio in FIG. 55 is allocated to each variation pattern, prepared in the ROM 90101 and having PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 as the determination result) And the random number value MR3 'read out to the random number buffer for variation, and the variation pattern (variation pattern at the time of a big hit) of which any one of PB3'-2 to PB3'-4 is executed this time Decide on).

  In the lottery of step S90263, for example, the first loss variation pattern determination table or the second loss variation pattern determination table prepared in the ROM 90101 and the random value MR3 ′ read out to the variation random number buffer are used. Any of PA1'-1 to PA1'-3, PA2'-1 to PA2'-2, PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 is decided as the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing) to be executed this time Do. The first change variation pattern determination table realizes the determination ratio of the table (FIG. 56A) in which one of PA1′-1 to PA1′-3 and PA3′-2 to PA3′-4 is a determination result. The determination value is a table assigned to each variation pattern), and is used when the time saving state is not made (non-time saving). The first change variation pattern determination table realizes the determination ratio of the table (FIG. 56B) in which one of PA2'-1 to PA2'-2 and PA3'-2 to PA3'-4 is a determination result. The determination value is a table assigned to each variation pattern), and is used when the time saving state (time saving) is made. Whether the time saving state is or not is prepared in the RAM 90102, and is specified with reference to the time saving flag which is turned on in the time saving state (the same applies hereinafter).

  Referring to FIGS. 55 and 56, at the time of loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern is higher in the order of PA3'-2> PA3'-3> PA3'-4. At the time of big hit, it is high in the order of PB3'-4> PB3'-3> PB3'-2. Therefore, the jackpot expectation is high in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. In the short time state, PA2'-1 and PA2'-2 (see FIG. 54) having a short special figure fluctuation time are selected. Therefore, in the short time state, the average special figure fluctuation time is in the non-short time state It will be shorter than when.

  In addition, the determination rates of PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 treated as PA1'-1 on the side of the effect control board 9012 are the other determination rates (determination rates in the same table and all the tables in FIG. 55 to FIG. 56) It is lower than the decision rate in That is, PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 are hard to select at the time of determination of a fluctuation pattern. Further, PA1'-1 and PA1'-2 and PA1'-3 treated as PA1'-1 on the side of the effect control board 9012 are set as determination results of the same table.

  After one of the processes in steps S90262 and S90263 is executed, a special figure fluctuation time (see FIG. 54) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined this time is set (step S90266). Specifically, a timer initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time is set in a predetermined timer of the RAM 90102.

  Following the process of step S90266, one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, which has a start condition established, is started (the change of the special symbol) (step S90267). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game is transmitted to the first special symbol display device 904A. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the drive signal for executing the second special figure game is transmitted to the second special symbol display device 904B.

  After executing the process of step S90267, the variation start time command (the above determination result, various commands for specifying the number of first or second special view reserved memory after subtraction, etc.) as a command at the start of execution of the special figure game Transmission setting is performed (step S90271). The fluctuation start command includes the first fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the first special figure hold storage number designation command when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, When the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “2”, the second fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the display result designation command, and the second special figure hold storage number designation command are included.

  After executing the processing of step S90271, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2" (step S90272), and then the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended.

(Special symbol variation process: Step S90112)
The special symbol variation process is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The CPU 90103 determines whether the elapsed time since the start of the special figure game has reached the special figure fluctuation time set above (the timer value after subtracting the timer value of the predetermined timer by 1 becomes 0) If it has not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game is supplied to the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B to be special After the process of changing the design is performed, the present process is ended. On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation time is reached (when the timer value becomes 0), it is the timing for deriving the variable display result, so the predetermined drive signal is displayed as the first special symbol display device 904A or the second Supply to the special symbol display device 904B and stop the symbols of the current variable display result determined above ("-", "-", "7" for "big variation", "3" for "non-big variation") The display (derivative display) is performed, the transmission setting of the symbol determination designation command is performed, and the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "3". Execution of the special figure game is realized by repeatedly executing step S90112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

(Special symbol stop processing: Step S90113)
The special symbol stop process is executed when the value of the special process flag is "3". When the current variable display result is "big hit" (when the big hit flag is on), the CPU 90103 resets the time saving flag and the probability change flag to off. Thereafter, transmission setting of the hit start designation command is performed, the special drawing process flag is updated to "4", and this processing is ended. In the case of a time loss state (when the big hit flag is off), it is determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays that can be performed in the time reduction state have been executed (the number of times of variable display is set by the time reduction counter provided in the RAM 90102) When the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving flag is reset to OFF, the value of the special process process flag is set to “0”, and the processing is ended. Even when the variable display of the predetermined number of times has not been executed due to "lost" and not in the short time state, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to "0" or the like, and this processing is ended.

(Big hit opening pretreatment: step S90114)
The big hit opening pretreatment is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The CPU 90103 performs an elapsed time after the transmission setting of the hit start designation command (the measurement may be performed by a timer provided in the RAM 90102, etc., and the same applies to other elapsed times). It is determined whether (a waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state) is reached, and if it has not reached, the big hit opening pre-processing is ended. When the fanfare wait time is reached, processing for opening the big winning opening (supply of a solenoid drive signal) and the like are performed to start the round game, and the special processing process flag is updated to "5". By repeatedly performing step S90114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, standby until the start timing of the round game (standby until the end of the fanfare), opening of the special winning opening, and the like are realized.

(Big win open processing: step S90115)
The big hit open processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The CPU 90103 determines whether it is time to finish the round game. The number of times the count switch 9023 is turned on (the number of gaming balls entering the big winning opening) becomes a predetermined value (for example, "9") (may be counted by a counter provided in the RAM 90102) or round When it is the timing to end the round game when the elapsed time (after opening the big winning opening) reaches the upper limit period (for example, 29 seconds) of the round game after starting the game, the big winning A process of returning the mouth to the closed state and ending the round game (process of turning off the solenoid 9082) is performed. When the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter provided in the RAM 90102 etc.), setting to transmit a hit end designation command is performed, and the special view process The processing for updating the flag to "7" is performed, and this processing ends. If it is not the last round game, the special processing process flag is updated to "6", and this processing is ended. If it is not time to end the round game, the present processing is ended as it is (the main winning opening may be kept open). By repeatedly performing step S90115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the opening state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening to the closing state, and finally the special winning opening is closed.

(Big hit post-processing: step S90116)
The jackpot post-processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. The CPU 90103 determines whether the elapsed time after the end of the round game (after closing the big winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (the interval period of the round game), and has not reached it. , The closed state is maintained, and the process ends. When the predetermined closing time is reached, processing such as opening the special winning opening is executed to start the round game, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5", and the present processing is ended.

(Big hit end processing: step S90117)
The big hit end processing is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In the big hit end processing, whether the elapsed time from the end of the last round game has reached a preset ending wait time (time corresponding to the execution time of ending executed on the effect control board 9012), that is, ending Determine if the waiting time is over. When the ending waiting time has not ended, since the ending is not ended, the big hit ending processing is ended as it is. When the ending waiting time is over, the ending is over, so next, it is judged whether or not the present jackpot type is "probable". The big hit type is stored in the big hit type buffer. If the jackpot type is "probable", set the probable flag to the on state. Also, regardless of the jackpot type, while setting the time reduction counter as the initial value (number of variable display executable in time reduction state, for example, 100) (the count value of the time reduction counter is, for example, each special symbol stop processing The number of variable displays performed in the time saving state is counted, and it can be determined whether a predetermined number of variable displays can be performed in the time saving state), and the time saving flag is turned on. . Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0", and the present process is ended.

(Others)
In the above-described series of processing, each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S90115 and S90116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the special winning opening is opened in step S90114. Also, when the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0", one variable display etc. is completed, so various data such as the state of the game control process timer and various flags (next variable display etc. You may want to reset the

(Main operation of presentation control board 9012)
The effect control CPU 90120 of the effect control board 9012 executes predetermined effect control main processing after activation. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of an example of effect control main processing. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S90701) to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S90702). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 10 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC (not shown). If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S90702; No), the process waits.

  When the effect control CPU 90120 receives an effect control command from a predetermined input port of the I / O 90125 separately from the effect control main processing, the effect control command is provided as a reception command, for example, the effect control command provided in the RAM 90122, for example. Store in receive buffer.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S 90702; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to turn it off, and performs processing such as effect control command analysis (step S 90704), effect control process Processing (step S90705), sound and lamp control processing (step S90706), and effect random number processing (step S90707) are executed. After step S90707, the process of step S90702 is performed. In the process for effect control command analysis and the like, the effect control CPU 90120 reads out and analyzes the reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, identifies which effect control command is the received command, and analyzes it. A process according to the specified effect control command is performed (details will be described later). The effect control process process is a process (including the execution of an effect and the determination of an aspect thereof) of instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute an effect according to an effect control command (details will be described later). The sound and lamp control process is a process of controlling voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R and turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909 (details will be described later). The effect random number updating process is a process for updating the effect random number used for effect control by software. The effect control CPU 90120 operates as a common module 90120A by executing effect control command analysis processing, sound and lamp control processing, and operates as effect execution instructing unit 90120B by executing effect control process processing.

(Processing such as effect control command analysis)
The effect control CPU 90120 analyzes the reception command (effect control command received by the effect control board 9012) stored in the effect control command reception buffer in the effect control command analysis and the like (for example, confirms the MODE data) ) To specify which effect control command the received command is, and perform processing according to the specified effect control command. When there are a plurality of received commands, processing such as effect control command analysis is performed for each command.

  FIG. 58 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified in the effect control command analysis processing and the like and the processing content performed for the effect control command. Note that each flag, each storage area, and command buffer in the drawing are provided in the RAM 90122. In addition, “set” of a flag means turning on the flag. Note that the state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area are reset or deleted at an appropriate timing (such as a timing when reception confirmation of the target command is no longer necessary).

  When the effect control command specified by the analysis is a fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, fluctuation pattern designation command processing shown in FIG. In this process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether conversion data is present for the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time (step S 90751). For example, the determination is performed with reference to a conversion table stored in advance in the ROM 90121. The conversion table is, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, for each fluctuation pattern designation command (decision target command in the left column), a fluctuation pattern designation command after conversion (data without conversion if there is no conversion) (right column It is configured as a table to which conversion data is assigned.

  In the conversion table, when the fluctuation pattern designation command after conversion is assigned to the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time, not the data without conversion, there is conversion data for the EXT data (step S90751; Yes) Replace the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time with the converted fluctuation pattern designation command assigned to the command in the table. Thus, the EXT data is converted into EXT data (specified value) specified by the conversion table as converted data (step S90752). By this processing, the converted fluctuation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 are converted to PA1'-1.

  After step S90752, or when there is no conversion data for the EXT data (when data without conversion is assigned to the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time) (step S90751; No), the fluctuation pattern after conversion The designated command (PA1′-1) or the fluctuation pattern designation command received this time is stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area provided in the RAM 90122 (step S90753). In this way, the converted command is once held in the storage means.

  By the above series of processing, a predetermined command (a command specifying the fluctuation patterns PA1′-2 and PA1′-3 of the EXT data “01” and “02”) among the fluctuation pattern designation commands is treated as a specific command. The image-based effects described later will be executed. Note that the conversion table may be configured with only EXT data. Specifically, the data in the column of the determination target command in FIG. 60 is only EXT data of each command (the MODE data is not required), and the converted data in the right column in FIG. It is good also as data of (mode data is unnecessary).

  If the effect control command specified by the analysis is a customer waiting demo specification command, the display control unit 90123 is supplied with an instruction to execute a demonstration effect that is an image-based effect for displaying a demonstration image. In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 executes a demonstration effect (for example, counts 30 seconds after receiving the execution instruction, and supplies a video signal of the demonstration image to the image display device 5 after 30 seconds. Start the display of the demo image by it).

(Effect control process process)
In the effect control process (see FIG. 61), after the effect control CPU 90120 executes the hold display image control process (step S90169), the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in the RAM 90122 .), One of the processes in steps S90170 to S90175 described below is selected and executed.

(Pending display image control process: step S90169)
The effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it has received a start winning command (a first or second start prize designation command and a first or second special figure hold storage count designation command). Reception of each command is performed depending on whether the corresponding reception flag is turned on or whether the corresponding command is stored in the corresponding command storage area. For example, when the first start prize designation command reception flag is on, it can be determined that the first start prize designation command has been received. For example, when a command is stored in the first special-image pending storage number specifying command storage area, it can be determined that the first special-image pending storage number specifying command has been received. The method of confirming the receipt of such a command is the same as in the determination of receipt of another command. If no command has been received, this processing ends.

  When the start winning command is received and the first start winning designation command is received, the number of the first hold display images is stored in the first special view hold memory included in the change start command. The display control unit 90123 is supplied with an execution instruction (an instruction to increase the number of the first hold image) of the image-based effect to be updated to the same number as the hold storage number designated by the number designation command. When the start winning command is received and the second start winning designation command is received, the number of second hold display images is stored in the second special view hold memory included in the change start command. The display control unit 90123 is supplied with an instruction to execute an image-based effect (an instruction to increase the second reserved image by one) to be updated to the same number as the number of pending storages specified by the number specification command. Thereby, on the screen of the image display device 905, when the first hold display image is increased by one, the first hold display image is added right-justified and the second hold display image is increased by one. 2 Hold display image is added right justified.

(Variable display start waiting process: step S90170)
The variable display start waiting process is executed when the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122 is “0”. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a fluctuation start command (a first or second fluctuation start designation command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, a first or second special view reserve storage number designation command) judge. If the above command has not been received, the processing is ended on the assumption that no command has been received at the start of fluctuation. If the above command has been received, it is assumed that the variable start command has been received, and the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1" to start variable display of the decorative symbol, and the variable display start waiting process is ended. Do.

(Variable display start setting process: step S90171)
The variable display start setting process is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process.

  In the variable display start setting process, the CPU for effect control 90120 changes the current fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area) and the current variable display result (display result designation command) Based on the variable display result designated by the display result designation command stored in the storage area, the final stop symbol (decided decoration symbol) is determined (step S90321). The final stop symbol is prepared in advance according to, for example, the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result, and is determined by lottery or the like (random number value is updated by random number circuit 90124 or random number updating process for effect) Use one of the random numbers for presentation). For example, when the display result at this time is "probable big hit", the final stop design is determined to any of "3 3 3", "5 5 5", "7 7 7" (the determination ratio may be arbitrary) (Eg equal)).

  After step S90321, the presence or absence of execution of the image-based effect, the mode of the image-based effect to be executed, and the like are determined (step S90322). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof etc. are determined by lottery using various tables prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 and arbitrary random number values among the random numbers for effects. Do. At this time, by referring to different tables according to display results, fluctuation patterns, etc., the jackpot expectation (including the expectation for execution of super reach etc.) is made different according to the presence or absence of the execution of advance notice etc. . In addition, when the fluctuation pattern this time designates reach, it decides to execute the reach effect which the fluctuation pattern designates (reach effect when reach is formed with the decorative design which forms the final stop design) Do. The same normal reach and super reach A to C may be used as categories, and a plurality of types of detailed reach effects may be prepared for each category. In this case, based on the reach effect designated by the current fluctuation pattern, the reach effect to be actually executed is determined by lottery or the like. For example, if super reach A1, A2 and A3 are prepared for super reach A, and the current fluctuation pattern is to designate super reach A, one of super reach A1, A2 and A3 is executed this time by lottery Determine the reach effect to be performed (determination ratio is arbitrary (for example, may be equal or may have different jackpot expectations)).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the start timing of the image-based effect determined to be executed in step S90322 (predetermined based on the relationship between the effect to be executed and the fluctuation pattern) (step S90323). Specifically, effect specifying data for specifying the type and mode of the image-based effect determined to be executed, and an execution-timing-specific timer value (the effect control process timer (provided in the RAM 90122) A timer value counted by a timer for measuring various elapsed times), which is set in advance by the relationship between an image system effect to be executed and a fluctuation pattern, and is prepared in the ROM 90121). Then, it is stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 90122. If there are a plurality of image-based effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores effect specifying data and an execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each image-based effect.

  After that, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an instruction (an instruction to start the execution) of variable display (image system effect) of an aspect specified by the variation pattern of this time and of the final stop symbol determined above. It supplies to 90123 (step S90324). In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 starts variable display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 executes variable display of the decorative symbol separately from the effect control CPU 90120). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer.

  Then, when the first change start designation command is received this time, the number of first hold display images is the same as the number of hold storages specified by the first special view hold storage number specification command included in the change start command. If an execution instruction (an instruction to reduce the first hold image) of the image system to be updated to a number is supplied to the display control unit 90123 and the second change start designation command is received this time, the second hold display image An instruction to execute an image-based effect (an instruction to reduce the second reserved image by one) for updating the number to the same number as the number of pending storages specified by the second special view pending storage number specification command included in the change start command The information is supplied to the display control unit 90123 (step S90325). Thus, on the screen of the image display device 905, when the first hold display image is reduced by one, the rightmost first hold display image is erased, and the other first hold display images are shifted one by one to the right. When the second hold display image is reduced by one, the leftmost second hold display image is erased, and the other second hold display images are shifted one by one to the left.

  Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" (step S90326), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Processing during variable display: step S90172)
The variable display process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display processing.

  In the variable display processing, the effect control CPU 90120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1 and determines whether the timer value after the decrease is 0 or not, thereby enabling the special feature corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether the drawing fluctuation time has elapsed (step S90551).

  When the timer value is not 0, that is, when the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90551; No), the start of the image system effect (effect determined to be executed in the current variable display) currently set in step S90323 It is determined whether it is timing (step S90552). Here, the determination is performed by determining whether the execution timing specific timer value stored in the above timer value storage area matches the timer value of the present effect control process timer.

  If an execution timing specific timer value that matches the timer value of the current effect control process timer is stored in the above timer value storage area, it is the start timing of the corresponding image system effect (step S 90552; Yes ), The display control unit 90123 (step S90553) is supplied with an instruction to execute an image-based effect specified by the effect specifying data stored in the timer value storage area corresponding to the timer value (an instruction to start the execution). . The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts the image system effect specified by the effect specifying data (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 executes the image system effect separately from the effect control CPU 90120 ). Although the display control unit 90123 can perform a plurality of image-based effects in parallel, by separately executing each of the image-based effects in different layers, the processing load regarding the execution of effects is reduced.

  When it is not the execution start timing of the effect (step S90551; No), after the step S90553, the variable display processing is ended.

  In step S90551, when the timer value is 0, that is, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90551; Yes), it is determined whether or not there is reception of a symbol determination designation command from main substrate 9011 (step S90571) . At this time, if the command is not received (step S90571; No), the variable display in progress processing is ended.

  If the symbol determination designating command has been received (step S90571; Yes), it is time to derive the final stop symbol, so the display control unit 90123 instructs the display control unit 90123 to derive the final stop symbol (decided decoration symbol) (step S90572). In response to the execution instruction, the display control unit 90123 ends variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 905, and derives a finalized decorative symbol (variable display result). Thereafter, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer (step S90573). The value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" (step S90576), and the variable display process is ended.

(Waiting process per special figure: Step S90173)
The special-image-per-wait process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether a hit start designation command has been received from the main substrate 9011. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, "big hit" is generated, and the display control unit 90123 is instructed to execute an effect (including a fanfare) of a big hit (including a fanfare). Supply. The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts the jackpot effect including the fanfare (image system effect) (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 separately from the effect control CPU 90120 is the jackpot effect Run). Then, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4", and the special drawing hit waiting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit start designation command has not been received yet, it is determined whether the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed. For example, it is determined whether the waiting time has elapsed by subtracting one from the timer value of the effect control process timer and determining whether the timer value obtained by subtracting one is “0”. If the timer value after the subtraction of 1 is not “0”, it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed, and this processing is ended as it is. If the timer value after 1 subtraction is "0", it means that the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed, so it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", The value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, and this processing is ended.

(Process during hitting: step S90174)
The hit and hit process is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the hit processing, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the hit end designation command from the main substrate 9011 has been received, and when the hit end designation command is not received, the present process ends. If the hit end designation command has been received, the display control unit 90123 is supplied with an ending execution instruction (execution start instruction). The display control unit 90123 receives the execution instruction and starts ending (image system effect) (hereinafter, the display control unit 90123 performs the ending separately from the effect control CPU 90120). Further, the timer value corresponding to the ending effect execution time (ending waiting time) is set in the effect control process timer, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, and the present process is ended.

(Ending process: step S90175)
The ending process is performed when the value of the rendering process flag is "5". In the ending process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1 and decremented by 1 is “0”, and if it is not “0”, this process is executed. finish. When the timer value is "0", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, and this processing is ended.

(Others)
In the above series of processes (steps S90170 to S90175), when the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", which is the initial value, one variable display etc. is completed, so the effect control process timer Alternatively, various data such as the state of various flags and the value of the counter (that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) may be reset as appropriate.

(Sound, lamp control process)
The effect control CPU 90120 receives the effect control command (the command analyzed and specified by the effect control command analysis or the like processing) or the instruction supplied from the display control unit 90123 (the instruction of the audio output synchronized with the image system effect, Based on the instruction to turn on / off the game effect lamp 909 synchronized with the image system effect, the speakers 908 L and 908 R output a voice via the voice control board 9013 or the game effect lamp 909 via the lamp control board 9014. Drive to turn on / off. As voice output based on the effect control command and turning on / off of the game effect lamp 909, for example, the game effect lamp 909 is turned on when the symbol determination specification command or the start winning specification command is received. As described above, in the sound and lamp control process, the sound output and the on / off of the game effect lamp 909 are controlled.

(About conversion of command)
Next, the handling of the variation pattern designation command will be described with reference to FIG. The variation pattern specification command is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 at the start of variation and is received by the common module 90120A. In the common module 90120A, if the EXT data of the received fluctuation pattern designation command is "01" or "02", these data are converted to "00" (no conversion of command except "01" and "02") . As a result, the fluctuation pattern designation command for specifying the fluctuation patterns PA1′-2 and PA1′-3 is converted into the fluctuation pattern PA1′-1. The variation pattern specification commands without conversion (“8100”, “8103” to “810A”) are supplied as they are to the presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B, and are used without conversion for the presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B (specification of the fluctuation pattern An execution instruction such as variable display of a decorative pattern is issued to the display control unit 90123 based on the command). On the other hand, fluctuation pattern specification commands with conversion (“8101” to “8102”) are supplied to presentation execution instructing unit 90120 B as fluctuation pattern specification commands after conversion (“8100”) and used (specification of the fluctuation pattern An execution instruction such as variable display of a decorative pattern is issued to the display control unit 90123 based on the command "8100". As described above, in this embodiment, predetermined commands (“8101” to “8102”) are treated as specific commands on the effect control board 9012 side, and processing for executing effects is executed. In this embodiment, the effects that can be executed based on the above specific command are the same regardless of the presence or absence of conversion. That is, the above specific command receives the same treatment regardless of the conversion.

(Effects in the embodiment etc.)
In the development of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a variation pattern specification command (also a variation pattern specified by the EXT data) output by the main substrate 9011 may be prepared in advance in a large amount (if added later, the variation pattern is determined When the table becomes complicated), as a result, the variation pattern specification command may be left over the pattern of the variable display of the decorative pattern that can be executed by the effect control board 9012 (with respect to the variation pattern actually used) Command may be lost). Since the remaining variation pattern specification command can not be used (because there is no effect to be executed), the effect control board 9012 can not operate in response to the command. That is, the effect control board 9012 may not operate properly. In this embodiment, the effect control board 9012 treats the remaining fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8101” to “8102”) as another fluctuation pattern designation command (“8100”) and receives “8100”. Since the effects determined by the execution determination of the effect (image system effect) are determined in the same manner as when being performed, there is no inconvenience such as the inability of the effect control board 9012 to operate for the surplus commands. The effect control CPU 90120) can suitably operate.

  Although it is conceivable to delete the surplus commands, it is not desirable to delete the commands as much as possible because the adjustment of the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern becomes complicated along with the deletion. Leads to In addition, it is possible not to use the surplus command, but in such a case, when the third party performs the operation check of the main substrate 9011 (microcomputer for gaming control 90100), the surplus for the third party concerned. Since the role of the command is unknown, the operation check by the third party may not proceed smoothly. In this embodiment, since the remaining fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8101” to “8102”) are treated as other fluctuation pattern designation commands (“8100”), deletion or nonuse of the command can be avoided. That is, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901 also has an excellent effect of being able to eliminate the inconvenience that may occur when the development cost increases and the operation check.

  In addition, as in the above embodiment, the same process is executed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern designation command “8100” that can be a converted command is one converted from “8101” or “8102”. Thus, the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated by executing the same type of image-based effects (reach effect, advance notice, variable display of decorative pattern) at the same ratio.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the change pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” which are the conversion target and the command after conversion are commands output by lottery referring to the same table, so It is possible to easily grasp how the pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are used, the relationship between each other, and the like.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 (the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern designation command "8100" is output) is a lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern PA1'-1, or All the lottery including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process may be all lottery, or all lottery including other processes (for example, lottery performed by the same hardware) Is the highest (for example, in FIGS. 55 to 56, the determination ratio of the variation pattern PA1′-1 is higher than the determination ratio of any other variation pattern), and the variation patterns PA1′-2 to PA1′− The determination ratio of 3 (the ratio at which the variation pattern designation command “8101” or “8102” is output) determines the variation patterns PA1′-2 to PA1′-3. Or all lotterys including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process may be all lotterys including other processes (for example, performed by the same hardware) May be the lottery)) (for example, in FIGS. 55 to 56, the determination ratio of variation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 is lower than the determination ratio of any other variation pattern) This may reduce the rate at which the variation pattern designation command "8101" or "8102" is transmitted, for example, a malfunction or the like that can not convert "8101" or "8102" into "8100". It can be suppressed as much as possible. Further, by handling the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” as “8100” having a high determination ratio, adjustment of the determination ratio in the lottery can be facilitated.

  In addition, making the determination ratio of fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 the highest in the drawing for determining fluctuation pattern PA1'-1 or in all the drawing including the drawing, and fluctuation pattern PA1'-2-PA1 Pachinko so as to satisfy only one of the drawing for determining the fluctuation pattern PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 or the selection drawing having the lowest value in all the drawing including the drawing. The gaming machine 901 may be configured.

  The determination ratio of the variation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3 may be increased to some extent. For example, in each of these determination ratios, a lottery for determining fluctuation patterns PA1'-2 to PA1'-3, or all the lotterys including the lottery (for example, all lotterys that refer to different tables in the same process) It may not be the lowest in all the lottery (for example, the lottery performed by the same hardware) including other processes. As a result, since the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” are used with a certain frequency, the operation check by the third party can be facilitated.

  Also, as in the above embodiment, the variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are commands that are not individually output in each lottery using different tables (for example, see FIGS. 55 to 56). By this, it is possible to easily grasp how to use the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”, the relationship between each other, and the like.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” are the serial numbers of the entire fluctuation pattern designation command (in the above embodiment, they can be identified by the serial numbers attached to each fluctuation pattern) or fluctuation patterns. A group designating a variation pattern of whether the value indicated by the designated command (for example, the value of the EXT data) is within a predetermined range (within a close range (in particular, a sequential number)) or in the same category (in the above embodiment, non reach). (See, for example, FIG. 54), which makes it possible to easily grasp how to use the variation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102”, the relationship between each other, and the like. The predetermined range may be, for example, a range in which the serial numbers of two variation pattern designation commands or the value of the EXT data is close to, for example, "10" or less. The category may be classified according to at least one condition, for example, whether it is reach or non-reach, normal reach or super reach, fluctuation pattern at the time of lost or fluctuation pattern at the big hit (for example, The category may be configured by normal reach at the time of losing, super reach at the time of losing, normal reach at the big hit, super reach at the big hit etc. In addition, the category may be configured by whether or not there is a pseudo ream ).

  Further, since a plurality of commands are treated as the same command for the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated for a frequently used command.

  Further, by converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” into “8100”, processing of handling of the command can be facilitated, and the effect control board 9012 can be suitably operated. Furthermore, since “8100” after conversion is stored (held) in storage means (a variation pattern specification command storage area), “8101” to “8102” can be handled as “8100” with high accuracy (especially, variation patterns) When referring to a specified command multiple times, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load, conversion error, and reference error when converting the command each time. In addition, since the same special drawing fluctuation time is set for "8100" to "8102," even if there is conversion of the command for "8101" to "8102," the decorative symbol variable in synchronization with the execution of the special drawing game. Display and other effects can be suitably performed without discomfort.

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications of the above embodiment and the like are possible. Although the modification of the said embodiment is illustrated below, at least one part of each modification can be combined unless contradiction arises. The configuration of the above-described embodiment and the configuration of the following modification may be omitted regardless of whether they are the configurations according to the above-mentioned "problems to be solved by the invention" or the like (in that case Can be another invention).

(Modification 1)
A portion (portion in which the common module 90120A executes steps S90751 to S90752) of converting the fluctuation pattern designation commands "8100" to "8102" into the fluctuation pattern "8100" may be provided on the main substrate 9011. In this case, for example, the CPU 90103 randomly determines a variation pattern and generates a variation pattern specification command (which is to be output to the RAM 90102). Then, the CPU 90103 performs the same processing as step S90704 to convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” into the fluctuation pattern “8100”.

  Further, the common module 90120A may be realized by a substrate different from the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 or a processor or the like provided on the effect control substrate 9012 but different from the effect control CPU 90120.

(Modification 2)
The fluctuation pattern designation commands “8100” to “8102” may be converted into another common fluctuation pattern designation command (a command that is not any of “8100” to “810A” that can be output from the main substrate 9011). In this case, the effect control board 9012 may perform the same process as the process based on the variation pattern designation command “8100” based on the other variation pattern designation command.

(Modification 3)
The effect control board 9012 does not convert the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” into “8100”, and receives the fluctuation pattern designation command “8100” when receiving the fluctuation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102”. The same process may be performed. In this manner, the variation pattern designation commands “8101” to “8102” may be treated as “8100”.

(Modification 4)
The type of command that treats one command as another specific command is not limited to the variation pattern specification command. For example, when there are a large number of variable display results (for example, there are many jackpot types), this command may be a display result specification command.

(Modification 5)
A command for effect execution is specified to the display control unit 90123 from the effect control CPU 90120 (a portion for determining effect execution or the like may be realized by another processor such as a DSP) which determines the execution of effect etc. The display control unit 90123 may execute an effect by outputting a command to execute. In this case, a command from the effect control CPU 90120 may be handled as another specific command (for example, the display control unit 90123 performs command conversion and the like).

  For example, display of a corresponding image (at least a hold display image of a hold display image or an active display image (an image corresponding to a special drawing game in execution)) corresponding to at least the hold of the special view game being held or running. It is possible to execute a change effect of changing an aspect over a plurality of special drawing games. The change effect is a type of preview advance notice effect, and it is a prefetch determination performed on the main substrate 9011 (when the start winning, the variable display result is “big hit” for the special drawing game suspended by the start winning, It is executed based on the judgment result of judging (predicting) whether or not the fluctuation pattern designates “super reach”. In this case, based on the determination result (a presentation control command for designating the determination result is transmitted from the main substrate 9011), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution pattern of the change effect (transition of the display mode of the hold display image). Determined in a batch by lottery etc. Then, a command for designating the determined execution pattern is output to the display control unit 90123, and the display control unit 90123 is caused to execute the change effect in the execution pattern. For such commands, one command may be treated as another specific command.

  For example, an execution pattern as shown in FIG. 65 (for example, a change pattern for the second hold display image and a pattern when there are three second hold display images) is prepared, and execution patterns SP1′-2 to SP1 are prepared. The display control unit 90123 converts commands B5001 to B5002 for specifying '-3 into commands B5000 for specifying the execution pattern SP1'-1, and executes change effect. In addition, the part of the content of FIG. 65 is a second hold display image for each special view game executed before the target special view game (the special view game corresponding to the second hold display image to be changed by change effect) It shows the transition of the display mode of. Specifically, the display mode in the special figure game three points before the target at the left, the display mode in the special figure game two points before the center, the special form one before the target The display mode in a figure game is shown. For example, in SP1'-6, the second hold display image of the target remains normal (display mode when it is not changed by the change effect) in the three special games before, and in the two special games The status changes from normal to special 1 (target big hit expectation is "medium"), and from the special 1 to special 2 (target big hit expectation is "high" type) in the special figure game one before (In FIG. 65, the active display image is excluded).

  Thus, a command that treats a certain command as another specific command may be a command used to execute the preview advance presentation effect. In addition to changing the hold display image, the pre-reading advance notice effect also derives a chance eye etc. as a finalized decoration pattern, and even changes the hold display image or the active display image a plurality of times in one variable display. Good. The command used to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect may be a command or the like indicating the result of the pre-reading determination.

  Since a plurality of commands are treated as the same command as the command used to execute the pre-reading preview effect, the display control unit 90123 can be suitably operated for frequently used commands. In addition, the configuration (the relationship of the determination ratio of the lottery, etc.) of the above embodiment and the like may be adopted as appropriate.

(Modification 6)
A command that handles a certain command as another specific command may be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to another effect control board. Also, for example, a command (for example, a command indicating the number of winning balls) output from the main substrate 9011 to a payout control substrate or the like may be used.

(Modification 7)
The variable display (which may be simply variable display) of identification information (special drawing, decorative symbol, common drawing, etc.) includes blinking of the identification information. For example, it is included in the variable display of identification information that alternately repeats a pattern in which all segments are extinguished and a single pattern (for example, lost pattern) in which at least a part of segments is lit in a special drawing or a drawing. In this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost design) appears to blink). In addition, the variable display may be performed by blinking the decorative symbol or the normal symbol. Further, the identification information which is variably displayed in the variable display and the identification information as the variable display result may be different. For example, a display for blinking one horizontal bar display ("-") is performed as a variable display of a special figure or a common drawing, and other displays ("7" in the case of "big hit") as a variable display result. Deriving and displaying “1” or the like if “missing” is also included in the variable display of identification information. For example, a decorative pattern other than the decorative pattern to be scrolled may be a finalized decorative pattern. In addition, in the variable display of one time, the aspect in which the identification information not displayed in the initial predetermined period is displayed after the predetermined period has also been included in the variable display of the identification information (the special symbol is a temporary stop of the final stop symbol) It may be a decorative pattern that appears for the first time, etc.). The gaming machine may be, for example, one that performs variable display.

(Modification 8)
The pre-reading determination may be performed on the effect control board 9012 side. For example, a command indicating each random number at the start winning combination may be transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 at the start winning, and the prefetch control may be performed in the effect control substrate 9012.

(Modification 9)
In the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is set to the “probable change state” by determining the big hit type at the start of the change, but the open pattern of the big winning opening at the start of the change ( Determines only the round game mode), and based on the game ball passing a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state, the game state after the big hit game state is "certainly changed state" It may be

(Modification 10)
The present invention is also applicable to a plurality of control means in a slot machine, and to a plurality of control means in an enclosed pachinko gaming machine having a game ball enclosed therein.

(Modification 11)
In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, etc., the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED The various rendering operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(Others)
In the present specification, expressions of comparison of various proportions such as the execution proportion of the rendition (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”, etc.) indicate that one is a proportion of “0%”. May be included. For example, it also includes that one is a proportion of “0%” and the other is a proportion of “100%” or a proportion less than “100%”.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5D hold storage display area 5F active display area 30 hold display mode corresponding LED
31 Displayed number of display compatible display 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control
C character image 901 Pachinko game machine 902 game board 903 game machine frame 904A, 904B special symbol display device 905 image display device 906A regular winning ball device 906B regular variable winning ball device 907 special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R speaker 909 gaming effect Lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Effect control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 9022A, 9022B Start port switch 9023 Count switch 90100 Game control microcomputer 90101, ROM 90121
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information on variable display as holding storage;
Hold display means capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means at a corresponding position;
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect that suggests control in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The pending display means is
When a pending storage is newly stored, the appearance display of the pending display corresponding to the new pending storage can be executed over a predetermined period,
If a new pending memory is stored while the specific effect is being executed, the execution of the appearance display is restricted,
further,
First control means for outputting a command based on a lottery;
And second control means for executing a process according to the command output from the first control means.
The second control unit treats a plurality of different commands as the same command and executes the process.
Gaming machine.